SPPA-T3000 User Guide

Engineering User Guide (2/3)

 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 2 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Documenation User Guide

SPPA-T3000 USER GUIDE .............................................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 Import and Export Functions ............................................................................................................... 7

1.1.1 Importing Project Nodes or Diagrams..................................................................................................... 7
1.1.2 Importing Hardware Engineering ............................................................................................................ 9
1.1.2.1 Creation of the Software Design ........................................................................................................... 10
1.1.2.2 Automatic Connections ......................................................................................................................... 12
1.1.2.2.1 Automation Functions with Predefined Ports........................................................................................ 14
1.1.2.2.2 Automation Functions with Defined Main Output Ports ........................................................................ 16
1.1.2.3 Wiring Diagrams .................................................................................................................................... 17
1.1.2.4 How to Carry Out a Hardware Import ................................................................................................... 18
1.1.2.5 Structure of the Import File.................................................................................................................... 21
1.1.2.6 FUM/SIM Conversion ............................................................................................................................ 24
1.1.2.6.1 FUM/SIM Automation Function Mapping .............................................................................................. 26
1.1.3 Importing Automation Functions ........................................................................................................... 32
1.1.4 Importing Macros and Compound Components ................................................................................... 34
1.1.5 Importing Prototypes ............................................................................................................................. 35
1.1.6 Importing Application Profiles................................................................................................................ 36
1.1.7 Importing GSD Files .............................................................................................................................. 37
1.1.8 Importing Report Types......................................................................................................................... 38
1.1.9 Importing Forced Ports.......................................................................................................................... 39
1.1.10 Importing TDY Engineering................................................................................................................... 40
1.1.11 Exporting Project Nodes or Diagrams................................................................................................... 42
1.1.12 Exporting Macros and Compound Components................................................................................... 44
1.1.13 Exporting Prototypes ............................................................................................................................. 44
1.1.14 Replace Prototypes ............................................................................................................................... 46
1.1.15 Exporting Report Types ........................................................................................................................ 47
1.1.16 Exporting Signals .................................................................................................................................. 48

1.2 Project Administration........................................................................................................................ 49

1.2.1 Administration of User Roles................................................................................................................. 50
1.2.1.1 Delete a Role......................................................................................................................................... 51
1.2.1.2 Define a New Role ................................................................................................................................ 51
1.2.1.3 Assign Specific Tasks to a Role............................................................................................................ 51
1.2.1.4 Copy an existing Role ........................................................................................................................... 52
1.2.2 Operator Working Place Manager ........................................................................................................ 53
1.2.2.1 Remove an OWP .................................................................................................................................. 53
1.2.2.2 Create an OWP ..................................................................................................................................... 54
1.2.2.3 Copy an Existing OWP.......................................................................................................................... 54
1.2.2.4 Editing an OWP..................................................................................................................................... 55
1.2.3 Administration of Users ......................................................................................................................... 56
1.2.3.1 Remove a User ..................................................................................................................................... 57
1.2.3.2 Assign a New User................................................................................................................................ 57
1.2.3.3 Copy an Existing User........................................................................................................................... 58
1.2.3.4 Adjust User Data ................................................................................................................................... 59
1.2.3.5 Adjust the Access Rights for an individual user.................................................................................... 60
1.2.4 Explanation of Access Rights................................................................................................................ 63
1.2.4.1 Adjust the Access Rights for a User or OWP ....................................................................................... 82
1.2.5 Administrator Safeguards...................................................................................................................... 85
1.2.6 Disconnecting and Reconnecting a Runtime Container....................................................................... 86
1.2.7 Activate Updated Automation Functions............................................................................................... 88
1.2.8 Committing and Rolling Back All Diagrams .......................................................................................... 90
1.2.9 Exporting Texts for Localizing ............................................................................................................... 91
1.2.10 Importing Localized Texts ..................................................................................................................... 91
1.2.11 Import Temporary License .................................................................................................................... 93
1.2.11.1 Enable Service Level............................................................................................................................. 93

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 3 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1.2.11.2 Enable Compound Component Access Mode...................................................................................... 93

1.2.12 Engineering Logs .................................................................................................................................. 94
1.2.12.1 Which Engineering Changes are Tracked? .......................................................................................... 94
1.2.13 Call Home Function............................................................................................................................... 96
1.2.13.1 Call Home Configurator......................................................................................................................... 97
1.2.13.1.1 Subscriber Manager ............................................................................................................................ 100
1.2.13.2 Group Manager ................................................................................................................................... 102
1.2.13.3 Send General Data.............................................................................................................................. 104

2 PLANT DISPLAY HIERARCHY VIEW............................................................................................... 107

2.1 Starting the View ............................................................................................................................... 107

2.1.1 Exiting the View................................................................................................................................... 107

2.2 General Layout .................................................................................................................................. 107

2.2.1 Toolbar ................................................................................................................................................ 109

2.3 Multi User Operation ......................................................................................................................... 109

2.4 Delete Single Plant Display .............................................................................................................. 109

2.5 Delete Plant Displays with all underlying Plant Displays............................................................. 110

2.6 Reset the Plant Display Hierarchy to Default................................................................................. 111

2.7 Insert Single Plant Displays ............................................................................................................. 112

2.8 Creating a Partial Hierarchy ............................................................................................................. 112

2.8.1 Partial Hierarchy Root ......................................................................................................................... 113
2.8.2 Find Partial Hierarchy Roots ............................................................................................................... 115

3 DIAGRAM EDITOR............................................................................................................................. 116

3.1 Starting the View ............................................................................................................................... 116

3.1.1 Exiting the Diagram Editor .................................................................................................................. 116

3.2 General Layout .................................................................................................................................. 116

3.2.1 Toolbars............................................................................................................................................... 118
3.2.1.1 Standard .............................................................................................................................................. 118
3.2.1.2 Links .................................................................................................................................................... 120
3.2.1.3 Alignment............................................................................................................................................. 121
3.2.1.4 Graph Layout....................................................................................................................................... 122
3.2.1.5 Interactors............................................................................................................................................ 122
3.2.2 Context Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 124
3.2.3 Single and Permanent Mode............................................................................................................... 125
3.2.4 Options ................................................................................................................................................ 126
3.2.5 Window................................................................................................................................................ 127
3.2.6 Saving the View................................................................................................................................... 128

3.3 Multi User Operation ......................................................................................................................... 129

3.4 Diagram Functions............................................................................................................................ 129

3.4.1 Printing Diagrams................................................................................................................................ 130
3.4.1.1 Page Setup.......................................................................................................................................... 130
3.4.1.1.1 Printing Page ....................................................................................................................................... 130
3.4.1.1.2 Drawing Page ...................................................................................................................................... 131
3.4.1.1.3 Special Print Options........................................................................................................................... 134
3.4.1.2 Printing Hard Copy .............................................................................................................................. 135

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 4 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.4.1.2.1 Adobe PDF Printer Settings ................................................................................................................ 136

3.4.1.3 Producing Image Files......................................................................................................................... 136
3.4.2 Tag Browser ........................................................................................................................................ 137
3.4.3 Closing a Diagram............................................................................................................................... 142
3.4.4 Opening the Library............................................................................................................................. 143
3.4.5 Zoom.................................................................................................................................................... 143
3.4.6 Pan and Zoom ..................................................................................................................................... 145
3.4.7 Magnifying Glass................................................................................................................................. 145
3.4.8 Diagram Grid ....................................................................................................................................... 147
3.4.9 Navigate .............................................................................................................................................. 148
3.4.9.1 Source or Destination.......................................................................................................................... 148
3.4.9.2 Embedded Diagram ............................................................................................................................ 149
3.4.9.3 Navigate Up in Embedded Diagrams.................................................................................................. 150
3.4.9.4 Plant Display........................................................................................................................................ 150
3.4.9.5 Function Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 151
3.4.9.6 Plant Manual........................................................................................................................................ 151
3.4.9.7 Linked Documents............................................................................................................................... 152
3.4.9.8 Notes ................................................................................................................................................... 152
3.4.10 Buffer Information Window.................................................................................................................. 153
3.4.11 Select in Project Node......................................................................................................................... 153
3.4.12 Diagram Layers ................................................................................................................................... 153
3.4.13 Find Tag .............................................................................................................................................. 154
3.4.14 Find Open Plant Display Mappings..................................................................................................... 155
3.4.15 Select in Project View.......................................................................................................................... 156

3.5 Edit Functions.................................................................................................................................... 157

3.5.1 Selecting Symbols............................................................................................................................... 157
3.5.2 Moving Symbols .................................................................................................................................. 158
3.5.3 Resizing Symbols................................................................................................................................ 159
3.5.4 Copy Selection .................................................................................................................................... 160
3.5.5 Paste Selection ................................................................................................................................... 160
3.5.6 Duplicate Selection.............................................................................................................................. 161
3.5.7 Delete Selection .................................................................................................................................. 161
3.5.8 The Property Sheet ............................................................................................................................. 162
3.5.9 Hiding and Unhiding Symbols ............................................................................................................. 163
3.5.10 Graph Layouts and Networks.............................................................................................................. 164
3.5.11 Graphic Shape Functions.................................................................................................................... 165

3.6 Working with Function Diagrams.................................................................................................... 166

3.6.1 Placing Symbols .................................................................................................................................. 167
3.6.2 Opening Masks ................................................................................................................................... 168
3.6.3 Setting AF Block and Proxy Parameters ............................................................................................ 168
3.6.3.1 Renaming AF Blocks and Proxies ...................................................................................................... 175
3.6.3.1.1 Inheritance for AF Block and Proxy Renaming................................................................................... 176
3.6.3.2 Inheritance within AF Blocks and Proxies........................................................................................... 177
3.6.3.2.1 Archive Parameter Inheritance within AF Blocks and Proxies ........................................................... 177
3.6.3.2.2 Alarm Text Inheritance within AF Blocks and Proxies ........................................................................ 178
3.6.3.2.2.1 Default Rule Inheritance Active........................................................................................................... 178
3.6.3.2.2.2 Manual Inheritance Rule Setting......................................................................................................... 179
3.6.4 Displaying the Plant Display Mapping................................................................................................. 180
3.6.5 Editing Links ........................................................................................................................................ 181
3.6.6 Connecting the Symbols ..................................................................................................................... 182
3.6.6.1 Local Connections............................................................................................................................... 182
3.6.6.1.1 Graphical Connection Interactor ......................................................................................................... 183
3.6.6.1.2 Click Connection Interactor ................................................................................................................. 184
3.6.6.1.3 Modifying Connections ........................................................................................................................ 185
3.6.6.1.4 Deleting Local Connections ................................................................................................................ 186
3.6.6.1.5 Multiple Local Connections ................................................................................................................. 187
3.6.6.2 Global Connections ............................................................................................................................. 188
3.6.6.2.1 Signal Connectors, Signal Definitions and Connections .................................................................... 189
3.6.6.2.2 Direct Global Connections .................................................................................................................. 191
3.6.6.2.3 Make Source Connector ..................................................................................................................... 192
3.6.6.2.4 Make Destination Connector............................................................................................................... 193

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 5 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.6.2.5 Editing Signal Connectors................................................................................................................... 195

3.6.6.2.5.1 Editing Source Connectors ................................................................................................................. 195
3.6.6.2.5.2 Editing Destination Connectors........................................................................................................... 196
3.6.6.2.6 Modifying Global Connections ............................................................................................................ 200
3.6.6.2.7 Deleting Global Connectors ................................................................................................................ 201
3.6.6.2.8 Multiple Global Connections ............................................................................................................... 202
3.6.6.2.9 Converting Connections ...................................................................................................................... 203
3.6.6.3 Making Port References...................................................................................................................... 205
3.6.6.4 Connection Routing............................................................................................................................. 206
3.6.6.4.1 How to Enable and Disable Automatic Connection Routing .............................................................. 206
3.6.6.4.2 Arranging Automation Function Blocks on a Diagram........................................................................ 207
3.6.6.4.3 Layout Parameters .............................................................................................................................. 211
3.6.6.5 Inheritance Between Connected Symbols.......................................................................................... 213
3.6.6.5.1 The Inheritance Connection Between Connected Symbols ............................................................... 214
3.6.6.5.2 AF Blocks and Proxies with Inheritance ............................................................................................. 217
3.6.7 Symbol Appearance ............................................................................................................................ 218
3.6.7.1 AF Block Information ........................................................................................................................... 219
3.6.7.2 AF Block Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 221
3.6.7.3 Connector Information......................................................................................................................... 223
3.6.7.4 Internal Connectors ............................................................................................................................. 225
3.6.7.5 Status Indication.................................................................................................................................. 225
3.6.7.6 Connection State Indication ................................................................................................................ 229
3.6.8 Macros ................................................................................................................................................. 229
3.6.8.1 Creating Macros .................................................................................................................................. 230
3.6.8.1.1 Embedded Macro ................................................................................................................................ 230
3.6.8.1.2 Macro from Selection .......................................................................................................................... 231
3.6.8.1.3 Macro from Diagram............................................................................................................................ 233
3.6.8.1.4 Convert a Compound Component to a Macro .................................................................................... 235
3.6.8.1.5 Macro Port References ....................................................................................................................... 236
3.6.8.1.5.1 Port Definition ...................................................................................................................................... 237
3.6.8.1.6 Preparing Macros for Prototype Assignment ...................................................................................... 245
3.6.8.2 Placing Macros .................................................................................................................................... 246
3.6.8.3 Modifying Macros ................................................................................................................................ 248
3.6.8.4 Deleting Macros .................................................................................................................................. 249
3.6.9 Compound Components ..................................................................................................................... 249
3.6.9.1 Differences between Compound Components and Macros............................................................... 250
3.6.9.2 Creating Compound Components ...................................................................................................... 251
3.6.9.2.1 Create a Compound Component From a Macro ................................................................................ 251
3.6.9.2.2 Create a New Compound Component................................................................................................ 253
3.6.9.2.3 Compound Component from Diagram ................................................................................................ 255
3.6.9.2.4 Copying a Compound Component...................................................................................................... 256
3.6.9.2.5 Compound Component Cycle Times .................................................................................................. 258
3.6.9.2.6 Compound Component Port References............................................................................................ 258
3.6.9.2.6.1 Port Definition ...................................................................................................................................... 260
3.6.9.2.7 Preparing Compound Components for Prototype Assignment .......................................................... 269
3.6.9.2.8 Preparing Compound Components Ports for Alarming and Archiving ............................................... 270
3.6.9.3 Placing Compound Components ........................................................................................................ 271
3.6.9.4 Modifying a Compound Component ................................................................................................... 272
3.6.9.5 Deleting Compound Components....................................................................................................... 273
3.6.9.6 Replacing Compound Components .................................................................................................... 273
3.6.9.7 License Protection............................................................................................................................... 275
3.6.10 Single Element Activation ................................................................................................................... 276
3.6.10.1 Preview Activation ............................................................................................................................... 276
3.6.10.2 Activating AF Blocks............................................................................................................................ 278
3.6.10.3 Deactivating AF Blocks ....................................................................................................................... 279
3.6.11 Quality Code for Feedback Loops ...................................................................................................... 280

3.7 Working with Plant Displays ............................................................................................................ 282

3.7.1 Placing Pictograms.............................................................................................................................. 282
3.7.2 Deleting Pictograms ............................................................................................................................ 284
3.7.3 Exchanging Prototypes ....................................................................................................................... 284
3.7.4 Setting the Pictogram Parameters ...................................................................................................... 285
3.7.4.1 Assigning the Process Connections ................................................................................................... 285

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 6 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.7.4.1.1 Manually Assigning the Process Connections.................................................................................... 287

3.7.4.2 Assigning the AF Type ........................................................................................................................ 289
3.7.4.3 Assigning the Faceplate Types ........................................................................................................... 290
3.7.4.4 Change default Device Symbols (For Symbol Faceplates)................................................................ 291
3.7.4.5 Assigning individual ports to Pictograms and Faceplates .................................................................. 294
3.7.4.6 Assigning Ports individually to a Pictogram ........................................................................................ 295
3.7.4.6.1 Inheritance Mapping of Individual Pictogram Properties .................................................................... 299
3.7.4.7 Assigning Ports individually to a Faceplate ........................................................................................ 300
3.7.4.7.1 Inheritance Mapping of Individual Pictogram Properties .................................................................... 304
3.7.4.7.2 Property Inheritance from Pictogram .................................................................................................. 304
3.7.4.8 Parameterize Pictogram Parameters.................................................................................................. 305
3.7.4.9 Parameterize Faceplate Parameters .................................................................................................. 309
3.7.4.10 Faceplate Trends ................................................................................................................................ 312
3.7.4.11 Setting the Number Format................................................................................................................. 312
3.7.5 Navigation Buttons .............................................................................................................................. 313
3.7.6 Working With Trend Displays.............................................................................................................. 315
3.7.7 Working With XY Curve Displays........................................................................................................ 317
3.7.7.1 XY Curve Display Background Image ................................................................................................ 318

3.8 Integrated Engineering ..................................................................................................................... 320

3.8.1 Diagram Assignment ........................................................................................................................... 322
3.8.2 Reference List ..................................................................................................................................... 324
3.8.3 Placing New AF Blocks ....................................................................................................................... 326
3.8.4 Placing New Pictograms ..................................................................................................................... 327
3.8.5 Deleting AF Blocks and Pictograms.................................................................................................... 329

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 7 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1.1 Import and Export Functions

There are many situations where the import or export of data is useful, or may be required. A number of functions exist
to facilitate the import and export of data to and from an SPPA-T3000 system.

1.1.1 Importing Project Nodes or Diagrams

Diagrams (Function Diagrams, Plant Displays, Point Groups, Report Definitions) and project structure (Project Nodes)
can be imported into the project. The files containing the data to be imported are available from a number of sources
(e.g. from other projects, or from the TEC Editor).

Manual scheduling is also imported. Imported diagram scheduling may require special attention.

Project Nodes or diagrams can be imported at any client computer. The data to be imported is contained in a file
(either a Zip (*.zip) or Java (*.jar) file format). The file must be stored on a drive available to the client computer.

When importing Project Nodes and diagrams it is also possible to modify them according to the copy and modify rules
set by the user. The IDs of imported items can be modified to match those which are required for a project (this is very
useful when diagrams from other projects are imported). It is also possible to preview the effect of the copy and modify
rules on the import data without actually importing the data.

How to Import Project Nodes or Diagrams

The Project View is open.

1. All diagrams in the complete project (of all the users) must be committed prior to importing new nodes and
diagrams.

All diagrams are committed to ensure:

The import does not interfere with any other work that is being carried out.

The user is able to easily rollback, and thereby remove the imported nodes and diagrams if required.

2. Select the destination node for the nodes or diagrams to be imported into.
3. Select the Extras menu, then Import, then Project Nodes/Diagrams from the drop down menus.
4. A dialog box appears to select the file to be imported.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 8 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

5. Enter the path and filename of the file to be imported in the Source Archive File field. Alternatively, click on
the button (on the right hand side of the field) to find the file using a browser.
6. Check that the Destination Node is correct, this can be changed if required by clicking on the button and
using the hierarchy browser.
7. If the imported diagrams are to be modified according to the copy and modify rules, click on the Modify
Diagrams/Nodes check box.
o The Preview check box can also be checked. If preview is selected, the user is able to view the
results of the import operation in the protocol file without actually importing the nodes and diagrams into the
project.
8. Click on Import to load the file, otherwise click on Cancel.
9. After the file has been read in, a dialog box will appear containing summary information of errors or warnings
from the file import. To view detailed information click on the Open Protocol button to open a protocol report
browser, otherwise click on OK.

The imported nodes and diagrams can now be treated like any others configured in the system.

Elements will not be imported if they conflict with elements already existing in the project (e.g. identical Tag
Names). Errors will be recorded in the protocol file.

Illegal characters are not permitted in the names of imported elements. If illegal characters exist they will
automatically be replaced by the underscore symbol (_).

The system automatically checks for, and closes any signal connections that may exist between components
in the existing, and imported Function Diagrams.

In the cases where this action leads to the inheritance of parameters between connected symbols, a dialog
box will appear listing the inherited parameters.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 9 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

If the imported diagrams include instances of the Generic PROFIBUS Interface proxy FD_GENERIC, the
corresponding GSD files are checked. If the GSD files do not exist in the system, they are imported with the
Function Diagrams. If they do already exist, they are not imported and the user gets a message.

Imported GSD files (GSD files not preinstalled with the system) are not covered by any warranty. A Warning
dialog will appear during import of these files.

The import data may also contain linked documents. These will be imported and the links to Automation
Functions will be made.

1.1.2 Importing Hardware Engineering

Hardware engineering involves the design of all the hardware components for signal IO that will be used in a project.
This involves the planning of bus components, IO devices and cabling. This hardware design is performed using a
separate hardware tool (for example Siemens tec4fde or AutoCAD etc.).

The hardware design is also of relevance for the software design in the SPPA-T3000 system since the IO devices and
bus components must also be configured here. The hardware engineering data can be transferred from the hardware
engineering tool into a file, and imported into the SPPA-T3000 system. This concept is shown in the schematic
diagram below:

The hardware engineering data is exported to an Import Data file which is formatted in Extensible Markup Language
(XML) specifically for hardware import. This file is imported into SPPA-T3000. In this way the hardware engineering
data only has to be entered once, and the data will be consistent. Unnecessary repetition of work (and resulting
inaccuracy) is eliminated.

When hardware engineering is imported the software representation of the hardware components in the system (i.e.
Hardware Proxies in Function Diagrams) is created automatically. The required connections to these components
which have been imported into Function Diagrams are also automatically created . This allows the user to first create

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 10 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

the software design then import the hardware configuration later, and the connections between the two will be
automatically made.

Wiring diagrams created by the hardware tool can also be imported into the system. The wiring diagrams are
automatically linked to Automation Functions and proxies from which they can be opened.

When the user carries out a hardware import, the configuration of the import data is checked by the system as part of
the import process. The system automatically identifies if the data is new or modified and will import the data so that
the hardware and software designs are consistent.

Existing software designs made for a FUM project can be converted to a SIM project. Conversion from SIM to FUM is
also possible.

1.1.2.1 Creation of the Software Design

During the hardware import process the hardware is configured in the SPPA-T3000 system. The data imported into the
system may contain either new or modified hardware. Below is described how the hardware is translated into a
software design, and also how modified hardware is handled.

How the Hardware is Configured in the System

The software design for the hardware IO configuration in the system is created automatically from the hardware import
data. The hardware layout consists typically of racks of IO modules arranged in cabinets. An example of a hardware IO
rack is shown below:

The rack consists of a number of slots into which modules can be inserted. The layout above consists of:

• A power supply module in slot 1 (for which no software configuration is necessary).

• A redundant pair of bus interface modules in slots 2 and 3.
• Various IO modules for analog and binary signals in slots 4 to 7.

Each IO module has a number of terminals available to which the cabling for the IO signals is connected.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 11 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The way in which the various components of the hardware design are used to create the software design are
explained below.

Function Diagrams

For each hardware rack a single Function Diagram is created. In this way all of the hardware components associated
with a hardware rack will be represented in the same Function Diagram. The name of the diagram is imported with the
hardware import data.

The new Function Diagram inherits its Runtime Container Assignment from the superordinate Project Node.

Hardware Proxies

For each of the bus interface and IO modules in the rack, a Hardware Proxy will be automatically placed in the
Function Diagram. For each of these devices the hardware import data file contains the following information:

• The product number of the module: from this the type of proxy required for the device is determined.
• The location of the module: this is normally an alphanumeric ID code and is used for the tag name of the
proxy.
• The slot number in which the module is inserted: this slot number is automatically entered as a parameter in
the proxy.
• A description of the module: this is used for the comment in the proxy mask.

For ET200M configurations, the parameters ID_RACK0, ID_RACK1, and SLAVE_NO in the signal IO
hardware proxies will not be automatically entered. These parameters are necessary for the PROFIBUS
network configuration. They must be entered manually by using the Diagram Editor or by using Spreadsheet
Engineering.

For EU90x configurations, the connections between the bus interface and IO modules are made automatically.

Channel Parameters

Signal IO is designed for connection to the terminals of the IO modules using the hardware design tool. Information
about the IO signals is used to automatically set the parameters of the Hardware Proxies.

The terminal numbers are used to determine the channel number in the proxy. The parameters of this channel will then
be set according to the hardware import data:

• The tag name and signal name for each input signal are set. The signal name is automatically appended with
_HW.
• For analog IO signals, the engineering units and upper and lower limits are set.

How the Configuration is Modified

When hardware is imported into the system, it may contain:

• A complete or a partial design.

• New or modified hardware.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 12 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The user may import hardware data at any time. The system automatically compares the new and existing
configuration, identifies any new or modified data and reconfigures the software accordingly. This is a powerful feature
as it means that the hardware configuration in the hardware engineering tool and the SPPA-T3000 system can be kept
completely consistent whenever the hardware design is changed.

The way in which various components are handled for modified hardware is described below:

Function Diagrams

If a Function Diagram already exists that contains elements of the modified hardware configuration (and has the same
diagram name), no new Function Diagram will be created. Should a new Function Diagram be required, it will be
created in a new Project Node named imported diagrams.

Hardware Proxies

If any modules have been added or removed from a rack, the corresponding Hardware Proxies will be added or
removed in the Function Diagram for that rack.

Channel Parameters

When signals have been added or removed, or any parameters modified, the Hardware Proxy parameters will be
changed accordingly.

1.1.2.2 Automatic Connections

When hardware is imported into the system, there are normally many signal connections that are required between
components in Function Diagrams. During the import process these connections can be automatically made by the
system, thereby saving time and relieving the user of the effort.

The way in which the connections are made is explained below.

Connections Between Hardware Proxies and AF Blocks

IO signals being sent or received with Hardware Proxies must be connected to AF Blocks. These connections are
automatically made in one of two ways:

• To predefined Ports of AF Blocks.

• To manually configured Connectors.

Both methods are described below:

Connections to Predefined Ports

Some AF Blocks have Ports which are normally connected directly with Hardware Proxies for signal IO (e.g. drive on
and off feedback signals, or analog signal monitors). For these Automation Functions the relevant Ports have been
predefined for automatic connection during hardware import. During the import process, the system searches for the
relevant AF block and makes the required signal connections.

For each IO signal in the Import Data file the system attempts to make an automatic connection to an AF Block in the
following way:

1. The system searches for an AF Block that has a tag name identical to the signals tag name.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 13 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. If a matching AF Block is found, the system searches for a matching predefined Port in the AF Block. The
import data file from the hardware tool provides the information required for the system to find a matching
Port.
3. For AFs with defined main output Ports an additional check is performed. The system checks for a match
between the signal names of the proxy signal and the AF main output Port signal. If a match is found then the
automatic connection procedure will continue.

The match between the input signal name and the output Port signal name only applies to AFs with
defined main output Ports. For these types of AFs the signal name of the input port has meaning (e.g.
XQ01 is the signal name for an analog signal). The same signal name should be used in further logic
in the system.

If the match is not found, the automatic connection will not be made. The user can still create a
manual connection, if desired.

4. For analog input signals the AF Blocks Port parameters will be set for :
o Engineering Units (EU).
o Upper Limit (UL).
o Lower Limit (LL).
5. The connection between the Hardware Proxy and the AF Block is created.

Connections to Manually Configured Connectors

Automatic connections can also be made to Ports which are not predefined for automatic connection. In these cases
however, the user must manually configure Source Connectors or Destination Connectors at these Ports before the
hardware import is made.

These connectors are manually configured as follows:

• For input signals:

1. A Destination Connector must be created at the input Port of the relevant AF Block.
2. Edit the Connector, enter the signal definition (i.e. the tag name, signal item and signal name) to match that of
the signal being imported.
3. The signal name must be appended with _HW.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 14 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

For certain AFs a signal name that matches the signal name of imported signal must be given to the
main output Port .

For these types of AFs the signal name of the imported signal has meaning (e.g. XQ01 is the signal
name for an analog signal). The same signal name should be used in further logic in the system.

If the match is not found, the automatic connection will not be made. The user can still create a
manual connection is desired.

• For output signals:

1. A Source Connector must be created at the output Port of the relevant AF Block.
2. Edit the Connector, enter the signal definition (i.e. the tag name, signal item and signal name) to match that of
the signal being imported.

For output signals the signal definition can also be entered directly in the mask for the AF Block. If a new
connection exists after the hardware import, a Source Connector will be automatically created.

When importing Failsafe Hardware Proxies, the system does not automatically establish the connections to AF
Blocks. Therefore the user has to manually configure the Connectors after the Hardware Import has been
carried out.

1.1.2.2.1 Automation Functions with Predefined Ports

The Automation Functions with predefined Ports for automatic connection during Hardware import are contained in the
following table:

AF ID AF Name AF Description Port Name Port Description

107 BSIG BINARY SIGNAL GENERATOR OUT Binary Output Value
IN Binary Constant
200 ASMON ANALOG SIGNAL MONITORING IN Input Value
FUNCTION
201 BSMON BINARY SIGNAL MONITORING IN1 Binary Input 1 (NO
Contact)

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 15 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

AF ID AF Name AF Description Port Name Port Description

IN2 Binary Input 2 (NC
Contact)
202 ANA ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT TOHW- IN Analog Input Value
PROXIES
205 ASEL3 ANALOG SELECTION FUNCTION FOR IN1 Input Value 1
3 VALUES
206 ASEL2 ANALOG SELECTION FUNCTION FOR IN1 Input Value 1
2 VALUES
207 BIN BINARY INPUT/OUTPUT TO HW- IN Binary Input Value
PROXIES OUT Output Value
250 ASMON_R REDUNDANT ANALOG SIGNAL IN1 Input Value 1
MONITORING FUNCTION
251 BSMON_R REDUNDANT BINARY SIGNAL IN1 Binary Input 1
MONITORING FUNCTION IN2 Binary Input 2
303 CCTRL CONTINUOUS CONTROLLER WITH FB_CLOSE Feedback CLOSED
SETPOINT ADJUSTER FB_OPEN Feedback OPENED
FB_NTRBL Feedback Equipment NO
TROUBLE
FB_LOC Feedback LOCAL
Control
OUT Controller Output Value
400 MOTOR CONTROLLER FOR MOTOR DRIVES FB_STOP Feedback STOPPED
FB_RUN Feedback RUNNING
FB_NTRBL Feedback Equipment NO
TROUBLE
FB_TEST Feedback
TESTPOSITION
FB_LOC Feedback LOCAL
Control
C_STOP Output Command STOP
C_START Output Command
START
401 SOV CONTROLLER FOR SOLENOID FB_CLOSE Feedback CLOSED
VALVES FB_OPEN Feedback OPENED
FB_NTRBL Feedback Equipment NO
TROUBLE
FB_LOC Feedback LOCAL
Control
C_CLOSE Output Command
CLOSE
C_OPEN Output Command OPEN
402 ACTUATOR CONTROLLER FOR ACTUATORS FB_CLOSE Feedback CLOSED
FB_OPEN Feedback OPENED
FB_TQNCL Feedback NOT TORQUE
CLOSE
FB_TQNOP Feedback NOT TORQUE
OPEN
FB_NTRBL Feedback Equipment NO
TROUBLE
FB_LOC Feedback LOCAL
Control
C_CLOSE Output Command
CLOSE
C_OPEN Output Command OPEN
403 SERVO CONTROLLER FOR SERVO DRIVES FB_CLOSE Feedback CLOSED
FB_OPEN Feedback OPENED
FB_TQNCL Feedback TORQUE NOT
CLOSE
FB_TQNOP Feedback TORQUE NOT
OPEN

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 16 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

AF ID AF Name AF Description Port Name Port Description

FB_NTRBL Feedback Equipment NO
TROUBLE
FB_LOC Feedback LOCAL
Control
C_CLOSE Output Command
CLOSE
C_OPEN Output Command OPEN
413 MOTOR_2SR CONTROLLER FOR 2-SPEED OR FB_STOP1 Feedback STOPPED 1
REVERSING MOTOR DRIVES FB_RUN1 Feedback RUNNING 1
FB_STOP2 Feedback STOPPED 2
FB_RUN2 Feedback RUNNING 2
FB_NTRBL Feedback Equipment NO
TROUBLE
FB_TEST Feedback
TESTPOSITION
FB_LOC Feedback LOCAL
Control
C_STOP1 Output Command STOP
1
C_STOP2 Output Command STOP
2
C_START1 Output Command
START 1
C_START2 Output Command
START 2
760006 FUM_MOTOR CONTROLLER FOR FUM 210 MOTOR IN1_FUM210 FUM 210 DCM Input 1
IN2_FUM210 FUM 210 DCM Input 2
760007 FUM_SOV CONTROLLER FOR FUM 210 IN1_FUM210 FUM 210 DCM Input 1
SOLENOID VALVE IN2_FUM210 FUM 210 DCM Input 2
760008 FUM_ACTUATOR CONTROLLER FOR FUM 210 IN1_FUM210 FUM 210 DCM Input 1
ACTUATOR IN2_FUM210 FUM 210 DCM Input 2
760009 FUM_SERVO CONTROLLER FOR FUM 210 SERVO IN1_FUM210 FUM 210 DCM Input 1
DRIVE IN2_FUM210 FUM 210 DCM Input 2
760010 FUM_MOTOR2SR CONTROLLER FOR FUM 210 IN1_FUM210 FUM 210 DCM Input 1
MOTOR2SR IN2_FUM210 FUM 210 DCM Input 2
760018 FUM_ASMON Analog signal monitoring function LINK_LINK1 LINK from FUM230/280
LINK_LINK2 LINK from FUM230/280
760019 FUM_BSMON Binary signal monitoring function LINK_FUM1 LINK from FUM210/280
LINK_FUM2 LINK from FUM210/280
760032 FUM_TTMON FUM232 ThermoTransmitter INPUT LINK_FUM232 LINK from FUM232
channel LINK_RED232 LINK from FUM232

1.1.2.2.2 Automation Functions with Defined Main Output Ports

There is a group of Automation Functions for which main output Ports have been defined. The signal name of these
main output Ports must match the the signal name of the hardware signal in order for the automatic connection to be
made during a hardware import. These Automation Functions and main output Ports are listed below:

AF ID AF Name AF Description Main Output Port

Port Description
13 MONIT HIGH/LOW SIGNAL MONITOR WITH DEADBAND Q Limit Signal Q
115 BSEL BINARY SELECTION OUT Binary Output
200 ASMON ANALOG SIGNAL MONITORING FUNCTION OUT Output Value
201 BSMON BINARY SIGNAL MONITORING OUT Binary Output
205 ASEL3 ANALOG SELECTION FUNCTION FOR 3 VALUES OUT Output Value
206 ASEL2 ANALOG SELECTION FUNCTION FOR 2 VALUES OUT Output Value

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 17 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

AF ID AF Name AF Description Main Output Port

Port Description
250 ASMON_R REDUNDANT ANALOG SIGNAL MONITORING OUT Output Value
FUNCTION
251 BSMON_R REDUNDANT BINARY SIGNAL MONITORING OUT Binary Output
FUNCTION
760018 FUM_ASMON ANALOG SIGNAL MONITORING FUNCTION OUT Output Value
760019 FUM_BSMON BINARY SIGNAL MONITORING FUNCTIONS OUT Binary Output

1.1.2.3 Wiring Diagrams

Wiring diagrams are created by the hardware engineering tool and contain cable termination information. These
diagrams can also be imported into the system as part of the hardware import. The system provides navigation
facilities to the wiring diagrams from different views in the Workbench.

Wiring diagrams are actually a type of linked document which have extended functionality for the hardware import.

Automatic Linking

Wiring diagrams are automatically linked to Automation Functions and proxies as part of the import process. This
obviates the need for linking the documents manually and ensures that the navigation facilities work properly.

Linking to Automation Functions

Wiring diagrams are automatically linked to Automation Functions which have automatic connections made to them.
The wiring diagram must be named the same as the Automation Function tag.

Linking to Hardware Proxies

Hardware Proxies gather together all the wiring diagrams which are relevant to them. This works in the following way:

• A Hardware Proxy has automatic connections to several Automation Functions.

• The Automation Functions have automatic links to wiring diagrams.
• The Hardware Proxy is automatically linked to all the wiring diagrams of all these Automation Functions.

Wiring diagrams for power supplies are also automatically linked to the corresponding Hardware Proxy.

File Structure

All the files for a wiring diagram import must be packed in a single zip file. The zip file may not contain any
subdirectories. The following files are contained in the zip file.

Diagram Files

Each diagram must be a single .pdf document. The file names must be the same as the tags to which they must be
linked.

Meta File

A meta file must accompany the diagrams. The meta file is named document_info.xml. This XML file contains the
following additional information for each diagram:

• Designation

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 18 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Document type
• Revision version
• Revision date

The meta file must conform to the following document type definition which can be found in the system installation
directory:

wiringDiagramImport.dtd

1.1.2.4 How to Carry Out a Hardware Import

To import hardware engineering and wiring diagrams (with import data produced by a hardware engineering tool)
proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. All diagrams (of all the users) in the complete project must be committed prior to importing new nodes and
diagrams.

All diagrams are committed to ensure:

The import does not interfere with any other work that is being carried out.

The user is able to easily rollback, and thereby remove the imported nodes and diagrams if required.

2. Select the Project Node in which the hardware engineering is to be configured.

3. Select the Extras menu, then Import, then Hardware Engineering from the drop down menus.
4. A dialog box appears to select the files to be imported. The dialog box consists of 2 sections, 1 for the
hardware engineering and 1 for the wiring diagrams.

The hardware and the wiring diagram import can be carried out:
o Simultaneously: Make the required entries for both the hardware engineering and the wiring
diagrams in the dialog box.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 19 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

o Separately: Leave the entry blank for the import that is not required. Automatic linking to wiring
diagrams will not be carried out if the corresponding Automation Functions and proxies are imported
separately afterwards.
5. For the hardware engineering proceed as follows:
1. Enter the path and filename of the import file in the Import File field (alternatively, click on the
browse button and open the file browser to find the file).
2. Check the Destination Node . This can be changed by clicking in the field and using the hierarchy
browser.

If the import data contains modified hardware, this will be imported into existing Function
Diagrams in the project. The existing diagrams may exist anywhere within the Project
Hierarchy.

Any new Function Diagrams will be created in a new Project Node named
importedDiagrams. This Project Node is intended to be used on a temporary basis. The
new Function Diagrams can be moved to a more suitable location in the Project Hierarchy.

6. For the wiring diagrams proceed as follows:

1. Enter the path and filename of the wiring diagram file to be imported in the Import File field
(alternatively, click on the browse button and open the file browser to find the file).
2. Select or deselect the Delta Import check box as required:
With delta import selected: New wiring diagrams are imported and the automatic links are made.
Existing wiring diagrams with names identical to those being imported will be overwritten.
With delta import deselected: All existing wiring diagrams and their linking are deleted before the
new wiring diagrams are imported.
7. Click on Import to load the hardware import data files, otherwise click on Cancel.
8. The system performs the first step of the import process. In this step the changes that will be made to the
SPPA-T3000 database are detected. The Result of Preview of Hardware Import dialog box appears. The
dialog box contains summary information about the number of warnings or errors related to the import.

1. Click on Open Protocol to open a protocol report browser . The protocol browser will display a list of
the changes to be made to the SPPA-T3000 database, and any existing errors or warnings.
2. Click on Continue to accept the changes and proceed with the import.
OR
Click on Cancel to abort the import.
9. The system performs the second step of the import process and the Result of Preparation of Hardware
Import dialog box appears. The dialog box contains summary information about the number of warnings or
errors related to the import.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 20 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1. Click on Open Protocol to open a protocol report browser containing detailed information.
2. Click on Continue to proceed with the import.
OR
Click on Cancel to abort the import.

Should no errors or warnings exist this step will be bypassed.

10. The system performs the data import. The changes will be implemented in the SPPA-T3000 database. The
Result of Import Hardware Engineering dialog box appears. The dialog box contains summary information
about the number of warnings or errors related to the import.

Click on Open Protocol to open a protocol report browser containing detailed information, or click on OK.
11. The system performs the wiring diagram import. The Result of performing wiring import dialog box
appears. The dialog box contains summary information about the number of warnings or errors related to the
import.

Click on Open Protocol to open a protocol report browser containing detailed information, or click on OK.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 21 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The hardware will be created in the system, automatic connections will be made and the wiring diagrams will be
imported.

The imported data can be removed by rolling back all Function Diagrams. Any modifications will then be
removed, and any new Function Diagrams will be deleted.

1.1.2.5 Structure of the Import File

The structure of the import file is not relevant for engineers for carrying out hardware imports, but is important for
developers when an interface for hardware import is being developed.

The import data file is an XML file, the structure of which complies to a document type definition (.dtd file). The
document type definition file is named hwImport.dtd and can be found in the system installation directory.

The import file for interface revision 2.0 has the following structure:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 22 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

hwImport

This is the uppermost level in the structure. The import mode is set here (i.e. complete or partial). The following
parameters can be set:

• projectName: Free for editing, must always be the same for the same project.
• interfaceRevision: The ID of interface described in the dtd file. New interface revisions are always backwards
compatible with previous versions.
• creationTool: Free for editing. The software used to create the file can be entered here.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 23 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• mode: The import mode, which can be either complete, or partial.

• importNumber: Set to 0 for a complete import. For the first partial import set to 1, and then increment by 1 for
further partial imports.

During an import SPPA-T3000 expects that the importNumber will be incremented by 1 for further partial
imports. If the importNumber does not follow the expected sequence the import will fail.

hwDevice

Hardware devices are the hardware modules that are being used. The following parameters can be set:

• planId: The diagram name of the Function Diagram in which the Hardware Proxy for the device is to be
placed.
• deviceName: The product number of the module.
• location: The ID of the physical location of the device.
• slotNo: The slot number of the device in the hardware rack.
• description: Optional text.
• deviceType: Relevant for FUM modules, indicates specific module application.
• powerSupplyDiagram: The ID for a wiring diagram for the power supply.
• removed: Relevant for a partial import, indicates when a device has been removed. Set to TRUE or FALSE
accordingly.

hwPinCollection

Contains all the information about individual signals, including the hwFunction and hwPin. The following parameters
are optional, and are only relevant for analog signals:

• unit: The engineering unit of the signal (e.g. kg/sec).

• unitLL: The lower limit of the signal.
• unitUL: The upper limit of the signal.
• typeAndRange: The type and range of the measurement.
• channel: The channel number of the hardware module.
• channelType: Relevant for select FUM modules, the type of channel use.
• redConnection: Relevant for FUM modules, index of redundancy pair.
• variant: Not used.

hwFunction

This is the assignment of the signal to a pin collection, and is used for automatic connections between the Hardware
Proxies and Automation Functions.

• afiTag: The Tag Name of the signal.

• afiTagUid: An additional alpha-numeric identifier provided for the afiTag. This identifier is used by the system
whenever the afiTag is renamed.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 24 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• afiItem: The Signal Item of the signal.

• afiItemUid: An additional alpha-numeric identifier provided for the afiItem. This identifier is used by the system
whenever the afiItem is renamed.
• signalName: The Signal Name of the signal, used for analog values only.
• afiDescription: A description for the signal.

hwPin

This is a description of the hardware pin on the module.

• pin: The name of the pin, consisting of a number or letters, and is obtainable from the manual for the
hardware module.
• connIdOrion: This field is used for the signal name for binary signals. This is the identification of the pin as
defined in the connIdOrionList0.xml file, which can be found in the system installation directory.
• connName: This field is relevant for binary signals only. This entry is normally same as connIdOrion, but may
be language specific. This entry is visible to the user, and will be displayed in the Diagram Editor.

1.1.2.6 FUM/SIM Conversion

SPPA-T3000 allows the user to easily reuse a project designed with FUM modules for a project that uses SIM modules
(ET200M modules) . The Hardware Import function is used in conjunction with a hardware design tool (e.g. Tec4Fde)
to convert FUM projects to SIM projects. Conversely, a project designed with SIM modules can be converted to a
project using FUM modules.

The procedure is described using the example of an existing FUM project.

An existing FUM project consists of collection of Function Diagrams containing FUM Hardware Proxies and FUM
Automation Functions. The FUM Automation Functions can have connections to other logic as well as process
connections to Pictograms on Plant Displays.

1. Create the hardware design using SIM modules in a hardware design tool. Use the same signal tagnames
that were used in the FUM project.
2. Export the hardware design to the Import Data File.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 25 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Prepare the existing FUM project in SPPA-T3000 by deleting the FUM Hardware Proxies. The FUM
Automation Functions will be left with open destination connectors.

4. Carry out a Hardware Import using the import data file containing the SIM hardware design.
5. The existing FUM project will be converted to a SIM project as follows:
o Function Diagrams containing the new SIM Hardware Proxies will be created.
o The FUM Automation Functions will be replaced with the corresponding SIM Automation Functions.
o Parameter settings in the FUM Automation Function will be transferred to the corresponding
parameters in the SIM Automation Functions.
o Connections between the Hardware Proxies and Automation Functions and to other logic will be
maintained.
o The process connections to existing Pictograms on Plant Displays will be maintained.

The procedure described above is also used to convert an existing SIM project to a FUM project.

This conversion procedure can also be used with project containing both FUM and SIM hardware.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 26 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1.1.2.6.1 FUM/SIM Automation Function Mapping

When a FUM/SIM conversion is carried out, the existing Automation Functions (e.g. FUM AFs in a FUM project) will
automatically be replaced with new Automation Functions. For example FUM AFs in an exisiting FUM project will be
replaced by SIM AFs in the new SIM project. In addition certain parameter settings and connections in the original AF
will be transferred to the new AF.

The mapping between FUM and SIM Automation Functions are shown in the tables below:

Automation Function Mapping

FUM Automation Functions SIM Automation Functions
NAME ID NAME ID
FUM_MOTOR 760006 MOTOR 400
FUM_SOV 760007 SOV 401
FUM_ACTUATOR 760008 ACTUATOR 402
FUM_SERVO 760009 SERVO 403
FUM_MOTOR2SR 760010 MOTOR_2SR 413
FUM_ASMON 760018 ASMON 200
ASMON_R 250
FUM_BSMON 760019 BSMON 201
BSMON_R 251
FUM_TTMON 760032 ASMON 200
ASMON_R 250

Multiple AF Type Mapping

There are certain AFs which could have multiple mappings. For example a FUM_ASMON could be converted to
ASMON or ASMON_R. In such cases the AF created during AF conversion is determined by the value of
redConnection in the hwPinCollection in the import file. A value of 1 or 2 indicates a redundant AF ( i.e.
ASMON_R, BSMON_R) has to be created. For all other values a nonredundant AF (i.e. ASMON, BSMON) will be
created.

Port Mapping

During a FUM/SIM conversion Port parameters and connections will be transferred from the original AF to the new AF
using the mappings in the tables below. If a Port or parameter setting cannot be transferred, it will be logged in the
Result of Import Hardware Engineering protocol. If the new AF contains a new Port parameter that didn't exist in the
original AF, the default setting will be used. If the range of the parameters for a Port are not the same for a specific
port, in the old and new AF, the default setting will be used.

FUM_MOTOR/MOTOR
Port Type Name Description
I QUALITY Quality code processing
I P1_STOP Protection 1 Command STOP
I P2_STOP Protection 2 Command STOP
I EN_STOP Enabling STOP
I A_STOP Automatic Command STOP
I P1_START Protection 1 Command START
I P2_START Protection 2 Command START
I EN_START Enabling START
I A_START Automatic Command START
I A_RESET Automatic Command RESET
I UV_TS Undervoltage Threshold Signal
I FB_LOC Feedback LOCAL Control
I BL_A Blocking Automatic Commands
I BL_M Blocking Manual Commands
I EN_AM Enabling AUTO/MANUAL Mode

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 27 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

I FP_MODE (*) First Pass Mode

I T_C Command Monitoring Time (sec)
I UV_TO Maximum Undervoltage Timeout (sec)
I UV_ST Undervoltage Staggering Time (sec)
O STOPPED Status STOPPED
O RUNNING Status RUNNING
O TRBL_AL Trouble Alarm
O DCO Link to Device Changeover Function
O UV Undervoltage Present
O TEST Test position
O LOCAL LOCAL Control
O COM COMMISSIONING Mode
O TAGOUT TAGOUT Mode
O AUTO AUTO Mode
O MAN MANUAL Mode
O RESET RESET Command

FUM_SOV/SOV
Port Type Name Description
I QUALITY Quality code processing
I P1_CLOSE Protection 1 Command CLOSE
I P2_CLOSE Protection 2 Command CLOSE
I EN_CLOSE Enabling CLOSE
I A_CLOSE Automatic Command CLOSE
I P1_OPEN Protection 1 Command OPEN
I P2_OPEN Protection 2 Command OPEN
I EN_OPEN Enabling OPEN
I A_OPEN Automatic Command OPEN
I A_RESET Automatic Command RESET
I FB_LOC Feedback LOCAL Control
I BL_A Blocking Automatic Commands
I BL_M Blocking Manual Commands
I EN_AM Enabling AUTO/MANUAL Mode
I FP_MODE (*) First Pass Mode
I T_TRAV Valve Travel Monitoring Time (sec)
O CLOSED Status CLOSED
O OPENED Status OPENED
O TRBL_AL Trouble Alarm
O LOCAL LOCAL Control
O COM COMMISSIONING Mode
O TAGOUT TAGOUT Mode
O AUTO AUTO Mode
O MAN MANUAL Mode
O RESET RESET Command

FUM_ACTUATOR/ACTUATOR
Port Type Name Description
I QUALITY Quality code processing
I P1_CLOSE Protection 1 Command CLOSE
I P2_CLOSE Protection 2 Command CLOSE
I EN_CLOSE Enabling CLOSE
I A_CLOSE Automatic Command CLOSE
I A_STOP Automatic Command STOP Moving
I P1_OPEN Protection 1 Command OPEN
I P2_OPEN Protection 2 Command OPEN
I EN_OPEN Enabling OPEN
I A_OPEN Automatic Command OPEN
I A_RESET Automatic Command RESET

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 28 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

I FB_LOC Feedback LOCAL Control

I BL_A Blocking Automatic Commands
I BL_M Blocking Manual Commands
I EN_AM Enabling AUTO/MANUAL Mode
I FP_MODE (*) First Pass Mode
I T_TRAV Valve Travel Monitoring Time (sec)
I T_STEP STEP Mode Time Period (sec)
I T_TQCL Torque Time Bypass CLOSE (sec)
I T_TQOP Torque Time Bypass OPEN (sec)
I SEAL_CL (*) Sealing direction CLOSE
I SEAL_OP (*) Sealing direction OPEN
O CLOSED Status CLOSED
O OPENED Status OPENED
O TRBL_AL Trouble Alarm
O LOCAL LOCAL Control
O COM COMMISSIONING Mode
O TAGOUT TAGOUT Mode
O AUTO AUTO Mode
O MAN MANUAL Mode
O RESET RESET Command

FUM_SERVO/SERVO
Port Type Name Description
I QUALITY Quality code processing
I P1_CLOSE Protection 1 Command CLOSE
I P2_CLOSE Protection 2 Command CLOSE
I EN_CLOSE Enabling CLOSE
I A_CLOSE Automatic Command CLOSE
I A_STOP Automatic Command STOP Moving
I P1_OPEN Protection 1 Command OPEN
I P2_OPEN Protection 2 Command OPEN
I EN_OPEN Enabling OPEN
I A_OPEN Automatic Command OPEN
I EN_OL Enabling OPEN LOOP
I A_OL Automatic Command OPEN LOOP
I EN_CL Enabling CLOSE LOOP
I A_CL Automatic Command CLOSE LOOP
I EXT_FLT External Fault
I A_RESET Automatic Command RESET
I FB_LOC Feedback LOCAL Control
I BL_A Blocking Automatic Commands
I BL_M Blocking Manual Commands
I EN_AM Enabling AUTO/MANUAL Mode
I FP_MODE (*) First Pass Mode
I T_TRAV Valve Travel Monitoring Time (sec)
I T_STEP STEP Mode Time Period (sec)
I T_TQCL Torque Time Bypass CLOSE (sec)
I T_TQOP Torque Time Bypass OPEN (sec)
I SEAL_CL (*) Sealing direction CLOSE
I SEAL_OP (*) Sealing direction OPEN
I ER System Deviation
I DB Deadband
I MINPAU Minimum Pause Duration (sec)
I MINPUL Minimum Pulse Duration (sec)
I GAIN Gain Factor
I TN Integration Time
I ANTI_W Limitation of I-Content
I BL_CL Blocking Closed Loop Direction CLOSE
I BL_OP Blocking Closed Loop Direction OPEN

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 29 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

O CLOSED Status CLOSED

O OPENED Status OPENED
O OL Status OPEN LOOP
O CL Status CLOSED LOOP
O TRBL_AL Trouble Alarm
O OL_REJ Reject to OPEN LOOP Mode
O CF Configuration Fault
O LOCAL LOCAL Control
O COM COMMISSIONING Mode
O TAGOUT TAGOUT Mode
O AUTO AUTO Mode
O MAN MANUAL Mode
O RESET RESET Command

FUM_MOTOR2SR/MOTOR_2SR
Port Type Name Description
I QUALITY Quality code processing
I P1_START1 Protection 1 Command START 1
I P2_START1 Protection 2 Command START 1
I EN_START1 Enabling START 1
I A_START1 Automatic Command START 1
I P1_START2 Protection 1 Command START 2
I P2_START2 Protection 2 Command START 2
I EN_START2 Enabling START 2
I A_START2 Automatic Command START 2
I A_RESET Automatic Command RESET
I UV_TS Undervoltage Threshold Signal
I FB_LOC Feedback LOCAL Control
I BL_A Blocking Automatic Commands
I BL_M Blocking Manual Commands
I EN_AM Enabling AUTO/MANUAL Mode
I FP_MODE (*) First Pass Mode
I T_CHO Command Changeover Delay Time (sec)
I UV_TO Maximum Undervoltage Timeout (sec)
I UV_ST Undervoltage Staggering Time (sec)
O STOPPED Status STOPPED
O RUNNING1 Status RUNNING 1
O RUNNING2 Status RUNNING 2
O TRBL_AL Trouble Alarm
O UV Undervoltage Present
O TEST Test position
O LOCAL LOCAL Control
O COM COMMISSIONING Mode
O TAGOUT TAGOUT Mode
O AUTO AUTO Mode
O MAN MANUAL Mode
O RESET RESET Command

FUM_ASMON/ASMON
Port Type Name Description
I T1 Smoothing Time in seconds
I LV1 Limit Value 1
I LV2 Limit Value 2
I LV3 Limit Value 3
I LV4 Limit Value 4
I DB Dead Band in %
I SUB_V Substitution Value
I UL Upper Limit

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 30 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

I LL Lower Limit
I EU Engineering Unit
I LSG1 (*) Limit Signal Generation 1
I HI_LOW1 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 1
I LSG2 (*) Limit Signal Generation 2
I HI_LOW2 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 2
I LSG3 (*) Limit Signal Generation 3
I HI_LOW3 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 3
I LSG4 (*) Limit Signal Generation 4
I HI_LOW4 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 4
I SUB_VS (*) Substitution Value Selection
I LS_GQ (*) Limit Signals GOD Quality
I AL_SUPQ1 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q1
I AL_SUPQ2 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q2
I AL_SUPQ3 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q3
I AL_SUPQ4 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q4
O OUT Output Value
O Q1 Limit Signal 1
O Q2 Limit Signal 2
O Q3 Limit Signal 3
O Q4 Limit Signal 4
O OUT_GQ GOD Quality Output Value

FUM_ASMON/ASMON_R
Port Type Name Description
I MINMAX (*) Minimum/Maximum Selection
I T1 Smoothing Time in seconds
I LV1 Limit Value 1
I LV2 Limit Value 2
I LV3 Limit Value 3
I LV4 Limit Value 4
I DB Dead Band in %
I DEV_DB Deviation Deadband
I T_MON Deviation Monitoring Delay Time (sec)
I SUB_V Substitution Value
I UL Upper Limit
I LL Lower Limit
I EU Engineering Unit
I LSG1 (*) Limit Signal Generation 1
I HI_LOW1 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 1
I LSG2 (*) Limit Signal Generation 2
I HI_LOW2 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 2
I LSG3 (*) Limit Signal Generation 3
I HI_LOW3 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 3
I LSG4 (*) Limit Signal Generation 4
I HI_LOW4 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 4
I SUB_VS (*) Substitution Value Selection
I LS_GQ (*) Limit Signals GOD Quality
I AL_SUPQ1 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q1
I AL_SUPQ2 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q2
I AL_SUPQ3 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q3
I AL_SUPQ4 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q4
O OUT Output Value
O Q1 Limit Signal 1
O Q2 Limit Signal 2
O Q3 Limit Signal 3
O Q4 Limit Signal 4
O OUT_GQ GOD Quality Output Value
O TRBL_AL Trouble Alarm

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 31 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

O OUT_AL Output Quality Alarm

O DEV_AL Deviation alarm
O Q_AL1 Quality Alarm 1
O Q_AL2 Quality Alarm 2
O OUT_IN1 Output equal to LINK_FUM1
O OUT_IN2 Output equal to LINK_FUM2

FUM_BSMON/BSMON
Port Type Name Description
I T_MON Deviation Monitoring Delay Time [s]
I SUB_VS (*) Substitution Value Selection
I AL_SUP Alarm Suppression
O OUT Binary Output
O OUTN Negated Output
O OUT_GQ GOD Quality Binary Output
O TRBL_AL Trouble Alarm

FUM_BSMON/BSMON_R
Port Type Name Description
I T_MON Deviation Monitoring Delay Time [s]
I SUB_VS (*) Substitution Value Selection
I AL_SUP Alarm Suppression
O OUT Binary Output
O OUT_GQ GOD Quality Binary Output
O OUT_IN1 Output equal to LINK_FUM1
O OUT_IN2 Output equal to LINK_FUM2
O TRBL_AL Trouble Alarm
O OUT_AL Output Quality Alarm
O DEV_AL Deviation Alarm
O Q_AL1 Quality Alarm IN1
O Q_AL2 Quality Alarm IN2

FUM_TTMON/ASMON
Port Type Name Description
I T1 Smoothing Time in seconds
I LV1 Limit Value 1
I LV2 Limit Value 2
I LV3 Limit Value 3
I LV4 Limit Value 4
I DB Dead Band in %
I SUB_V Substitution Value
I UL Upper Limit
I LL Lower Limit
I EU Engineering Unit
I LSG1 (*) Limit Signal Generation 1
I HI_LOW1 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 1
I LSG2 (*) Limit Signal Generation 2
I HI_LOW2 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 2
I LSG3 (*) Limit Signal Generation 3
I HI_LOW3 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 3
I LSG4 (*) Limit Signal Generation 4
I HI_LOW4 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 4
I SUB_VS (*) Substitution Value Selection
I LS_GQ (*) Limit Signals GOD Quality
I AL_SUPQ1 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q1
I AL_SUPQ2 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q2
I AL_SUPQ3 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q3

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 32 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

I AL_SUPQ4 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q4

O OUT Output Value
O Q1 Limit Signal 1
O Q2 Limit Signal 2
O Q3 Limit Signal 3
O Q4 Limit Signal 4
O OUT_GQ GOD Quality Output Value

FUM_TTMON/ASMON_R
Port Type Name Description
I MINMAX (*) Minimum/Maximum Selection
I T1 Smoothing Time in seconds
I LV1 Limit Value 1
I LV2 Limit Value 2
I LV3 Limit Value 3
I LV4 Limit Value 4
I DB Dead Band in %
I DEV_DB Deviation Deadband
I T_MON Deviation Monitoring Delay Time (sec)
I SUB_V Substitution Value
I UL Upper Limit
I LL Lower Limit
I EU Engineering Unit
I LSG1 (*) Limit Signal Generation 1
I HI_LOW1 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 1
I LSG2 (*) Limit Signal Generation 2
I HI_LOW2 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 2
I LSG3 (*) Limit Signal Generation 3
I HI_LOW3 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 3
I LSG4 (*) Limit Signal Generation 4
I HI_LOW4 (*) Upper/Lower Limit 4
I SUB_VS (*) Substitution Value Selection
I LS_GQ (*) Limit Signals GOD Quality
I AL_SUPQ1 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q1
I AL_SUPQ2 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q2
I AL_SUPQ3 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q3
I AL_SUPQ4 (*) Alarm Suppression Output Q4
O OUT Output Value
O Q1 Limit Signal 1
O Q2 Limit Signal 2
O Q3 Limit Signal 3
O Q4 Limit Signal 4
O OUT_GQ GOD Quality Output Value
O TRBL_AL Trouble Alarm
O OUT_AL Output Quality Alarm
O DEV_AL Deviation alarm
O Q_AL1 Quality Alarm 1
O Q_AL2 Quality Alarm 2
O OUT_IN1 Output equal to LINK_FUM1
O OUT_IN2 Output equal to LINK_FUM2

1.1.3 Importing Automation Functions

Automation Functions can be imported from a file into the project. This is done to both:

• make new Automation Functions available in the project, and

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 33 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• update existing Automation Functions already available in the project.

Any new Automation Functions will automatically be made available for use in the SPPA-T3000 Library.

If an AF which is being imported has already been used in the project (i.e. placed as an AF Block in a Function
Diagram), then the imported AF will replace the existing AF, in both the Project Container and the Runtime Container.

Replaced AFs become active immediately in the system after the import. Ensure that any necessary
precautions have been taken prior to replacing the AFs (e.g. informing operating staff of the change, or
ensuring relevant controls are put into manual where required).

The Import File

Automations Functions can be imported at any client computer. The update information is contained in a file (either a
Zip (*.zip) or Java (*.jar) file format). The file must be stored on a drive available to the client computer.

There can be up to several files associated with each AF being imported. The files associated with AF can be
categorized into one of the following types:

• Engineering Information: Information for creating and parameterizing the Automation Functions, e.g.
Prototypes, Automation Function types, profiles containing information for offline calculation, or foreign
language text files.
• Runtime Information: Information required by the Runtime Containers for executing Automation Functions.
• For Java Runtime Containers these are Java classes; and for S7 Runtime Containers it is the S7 CPU
Execution Frame, which is executed in an S7 CPU.

How to Import Automation Functions

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Extras menu, then Import, then Automation Function from the drop down menus.
2. A dialog box appears to select the file to be imported.

3. Enter the path and filename of the file to be imported (alternatively, click on the browse button and open the
file browser to find the file).
4. Click on Load to load the file, otherwise click on Cancel.
5. After the file has been read the Import Result dialog box appears.
6. For detailed information of the content of the import file open the protocol, otherwise click on Continue.
7. The import file gets stored on the Application Server. The result is committed by a dialog box. Click on OK.
8. If runtime information was included in the import file the Activate updated AFs dialog box will appear. This
dialog box lists the Runtime Containers affected by the newly imported Automation Functions. Proceed to
update the affected Runtime Containers.

The Automation Functions will be imported.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 34 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Another import is only possible, after all of the affected Runtime Containers has been updated.

1.1.4 Importing Macros and Compound Components

Macros and Compound Components can be imported into the project. Files containing the Macros and Compound
Components to be imported may have been exported from other projects.

Macros and Compound Components can be imported at any client computer. The data to be imported is contained in a
file (either a Zip (*.zip) or Java (*.jar) file format). The file must be stored on a drive available to the client computer.

When importing Macros it is also possible to modify them according to the copy and modify rules set by the user. It is
also possible to preview the effect of the copy and modify rules on the import data without actually importing the data.

How to Import Macros and Compound Components

The Project View is open.

1. All diagrams in the complete project (of all the users) must be committed prior to importing Macros and
Compound Components.

All diagrams are committed to ensure:

The import does not interfere with any other work that is being carried out.

The user is able to easily rollback, and thereby remove the imported Macros if required.

2. Select the destination Library Node for the Macros to be imported into.
3. Select the Extras menu, then Import, then Macros/Compound Components from the drop down menus.
4. The Import Macro(s) dialog box appears to select the file to be imported.

5. Enter the path and filename of the file to be imported in the Source Archive File field (alternatively, click on
the browse button and open the file browser to find the file).

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 35 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

6. Check that the Destination Node is correct, this can be changed if required by clicking on the button and
using the hierarchy browser.
7. If the imported Macros are to be modified according to the copy and modify rules, click on the Modify
Macros/Nodes check box.
o The Preview check box can also be checked. If preview is selected, the user is able to view the
results of the import operation in the protocol file without actually importing the nodes and Macros into the
project.
8. Click on Import to load the file, otherwise click on Cancel.
9. After the file has been read in, a dialog box will appear containing summary information of errors or warnings
from the file import. To view detailed information click on the Open Protocol button to open a protocol report
browser, otherwise click on OK.

The imported Macros and Compound Components can now be treated like any others in the library.

Elements will not be imported if they conflict with elements already existing in the project (e.g. identical Tag
Names). Errors will be recorded in the protocol file.

Illegal characters are not permitted in the names of imported elements. If illegal characters exist they will
automatically be replaced by the underscore symbol (_).

1.1.5 Importing Prototypes

Prototypes can be imported into the project.

Prototypes can be imported at any client computer. The data to be imported is contained in a file (either a Zip (*.zip) or
Jar (*.jar) file format). The file must be stored on a drive available to the client computer.

How to Import Prototypes

The Project View is open.

1. Select the destination Library Node for the Prototypes to be imported into.
2. Select the Extras menu, then Import, then Prototypes from the drop down menus.
3. The Import/Update Prototype dialog box appears.

4. Enter the path and filename of the file to be imported in the Prototypes (Zip-File) field (alternatively, click on
the browse button and open the file browser to find the file).
5. Click on Load to load the file, otherwise click on Cancel.
6. After the file has been read in, a dialog box will appear containing summary information of errors or warnings
from the file import.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 36 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The imported Prototypes can now be treated like any others in the Prototypes.

Elements will not be imported if they conflict with elements which already exist in the project (e.g. identical Tag
Names). Errors will be recorded in the protocol file.

Illegal characters are not permitted in the names of imported elements. If illegal characters exist they will
automatically be replaced by the underscore symbol (_).

Prototypes can be edited by the Prototype Editor.

1.1.6 Importing Application Profiles

Application Profiles must be imported into the project.

The profiles are always on the secondary Server in the parameterized folder. If a second profile was generated in the
Admin Console for a Runtime Container then this one can also be imported.

How to Import an Application Profile

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Extras menu, then Import, then Application Profile from the drop down menus.
2. The Import Application Profile dialog box appears.

3. Enter the path and filename of the file to be imported in the Application Profile field (alternatively, click on
the browse button and open the file browser to find the file).
4. Click on Import to load the file, otherwise click on Cancel.
5. After the file has been read in, a dialog box will appear containing summary information of errors or warnings
from the file import.

The imported Application Profile can now be assigned to the Runtime Container.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 37 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1.1.7 Importing GSD Files

PROFIBUS GSD (and GSE) files can be imported via the Workbench into the project for use in Generic PROFIBUS
Interface engineering. Alternatively, the GSD files can be imported using the SIMATIC Manager.

A list of all GSD files currently in the Workbench is available.

How to Import a GSD File

To import a GSD file, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Extras menu, then Import, then GSD file... from the drop down menus.

The user must have access right Project administration to select the menu option.

2. A Warning dialog will appear.

Only the pre-installed GSD files in SPPA-T3000 are covered by warranty.

Imported GSD files are not covered by any warranty.

3. The Import GSD File dialog box opens beneath the Warning dialog. Click on OK to close the Warning dialog
box.

4. Select the Import GSD File dialog box and enter the path of the GSD File, or click on the browse button (on
the right hand side of the field) to find the file using a browser.

Only .gsd and .gse type files are supported for import. If another type of definition file is required
(e.g. .gsg, .gss, .gsf), the extension can be changed to .gsd and imported.

5. Click on Import to import the GSD file. Otherwise, click Cancel to close.
6. The file is checked for version and syntactical correctness. If the file (either same or different version) already
exists in the system, the user is then given the option to overwrite the existing file or to cancel the import.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 38 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Existing instances of the GSD file and their parameterization in FD_GENERIC blocks are not
affected. The process to update or change the GSD assignment (including version) of existing
FD_GENERIC blocks is described separately.

7. The Result of Import GSD dialog box appears and lists the Number of Errors and the Number of
Warnings:

The Open Protocol button will open a Protocol Report Browser.

8. If no warnings or errors exist, click OK to complete the import process.

The imported GSD file is added to the system.

1.1.8 Importing Report Types

Report types can be imported into the project. Reports types developed for other projects can be imported. These
become available for use in the project.

Report Types can be imported at any client computer. The data to be imported is contained in a *.jar file. The file must
be stored on a drive available to the client computer.

How to Import Report Types

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Extras menu, then Import, then Report Type from the drop down menus.
2. The Import Report Type dialog box appears.

3. Enter the path and filename of the file to be imported in the Report type File field (alternatively, click on the
browse button and open the file browser to find the file).
4. Click on Import to load the file, otherwise click on Cancel.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 39 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

5. After the file has been read in, a dialog box will appear containing summary information of errors or warnings
from the file import. To view detailed information click on the Open Protocol button to open a protocol report
browser, otherwise click on OK.

The imported report types can now be treated like any others in the Project.

1.1.9 Importing Forced Ports

Multiple AF Ports can be forced simultaneously by importing a file containing a list of Ports and corresponding forced
values.

When forcing Ports care must be taken. There may be safety implications e.g. a drive interlock may be
overridden, or some other undesired effect on the control system may take place.

Creating the Import File

To create the import file in the appropriate format proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Create the list of Forced Ports using the Documentation function.

2. Export the list to a .xls, .csv or .txt file.

3. Append the list with the data for additional Ports and values to be forced. Make sure the appended data
conforms to the file structure. As a minimum the following fields must contain data:
o Tag-Name including the Item
o Port-Name
o Value
4. Save the file in .xls, .csv or .txt format.

The import file containing a Forced Ports table is created.

Importing the Forced Values File

To import the forced values import file proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Extras menu, then Import, then Forced Ports from the drop down menus.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 40 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. The Import Forced Ports dialog box will open.

3. Enter the name of the file containing the Forced Ports Table, or click on the browse button to find the file
using a browser.
4. Select or deselect the Reset Existing Forcing as required.
The Reset Existing Forcing check box has the following effect:
o If Reset Existing Forcing is selected then Ports in the project that are currently forced, but not
listed in the import file, will be reset.
o If Reset Existing Forcing is not selected then and Ports in the project that are currently forced, but
not listed in the import file, will be left as forced.
5. Click on Import.
6. The Forced Ports dialog box will appear with a list of all Ports to be forced to the corresponding Value.

7. Click on Force.

All Ports on the list will be forced simultaneously.

1.1.10 Importing TDY Engineering

The TDY configuration for all plant units is carried out on a central server at Siemens PG. A .zip file is created for each
TDY configuration which is imported into the SPPA-T3000 workbench.

The Project View is open.

1. All diagrams (of all the users) in the complete project must be committed prior to importing new nodes and
diagrams.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 41 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

All diagrams are committed to ensure:

• The import does not interfere with any other work that is being carried out.
• The user is able to easily rollback, and thereby remove the imported nodes and diagrams if
required.

2. Select the Project Node in which the hardware engineering is to be configured.

If the import data contains modified TDY Automation Functions, this will be imported into existing
Function Diagrams in the project. The existing diagrams may exist anywhere within the Project
Hierarchy.

3. Select the Extras menu, then Import, then TDY Engineering from the drop down menus.
4. A dialog box appears to select the file to be imported.

1. Enter the path and filename of the file to be imported in the TDY Configuration File field
(alternatively, click on the browse button and open the file browser to find the file).
2. Check that the Destination Node is the Project Node that was selected in Step 2. This can be
changed, if required, by clicking in the field and using the hierarchy browser.
3. Click on Import to load the hardware import data file, otherwise click on Cancel.
5. The system performs the first step of the import process. In this step the changes that will be made to the
SPPA-T3000 database are detected. The Result of Preparation of Hardware Import dialog box appears.
The dialog box contains summary information about the number of warnings or errors related to the import.

1. Click on Open Protocol to open a protocol report browser . The protocol browser will display a list of
the changes to be made to the SPPA-T3000 database, and any existing errors or warnings.
2. Click on Continue to accept the changes and proceed with the import.
OR
Click on Cancel to abort the import.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 42 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

6. The system performs the data import. The changes will be implemented in the SPPA-T3000 database. The
Result of Import Tdy Engineering dialog box appears. The dialog box contains summary information about
the number of warnings or errors related to the import.

Click on Open Protocol to open a protocol report browser containing detailed information, or click on OK.

The TDY Function Diagram will be created in the system. The Function Diagram uses the PKZ as the diagram name.
Any matches that are found for input and output signals of the TDY AF blocks will be automatically closed.

The imported data can be removed by rolling back all Function Diagrams. Any modifications will then be
removed, and any new Function Diagrams will be deleted.

If importing configuration data for an existing TDY Function Diagram, the AF blocks on the Function Diagram
must be deactivated. If one or more AF blocks on the Diagram are still activated, the import will be cancelled.

1.1.11 Exporting Project Nodes or Diagrams

Function Diagrams, Plant displays and project structure (Project Nodes) can be exported from the project. The files
which are exported can then be used in other projects.

Project Nodes or diagrams can be exported by a user situated at any client computer. The data is exported in a file,
with a Java (*.jar) file format. The file will be stored on the Application Server.

To export Project Nodes or diagrams, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select nodes or diagrams to be exported.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 43 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

When a Project Node is selected, the entire contents of the node and its structure will be exported.

2. Select the Extras menu, then Export, then Project Nodes or Diagrams from the drop down menus.
3. A dialog box appears to confirm the node or diagrams to be exported.

o Source Node/Diagram indicates the node to be exported. This can be changed by clicking on the
browse button and selecting a new node.
o Archive File is the name of the file that will be exported.
The node name may contain illegal characters or characters that are not in the normal English character set.
In this case the characters may be replaced by underscores (_) or the node ID may be used.
4. Click on Export to export the file, otherwise click on Cancel.
5. After the file has been exported, a dialog box will appear containing summary information about errors or
warnings from the file export. To view detailed information click on the Open Protocol button to open a
protocol report browser, otherwise click on OK.

Exported files can be downloaded from the server. The files are located in the following directory:
Orion/OrionImport/, and are all of type jar archive (i.e. file extension .jar).

If the exported diagrams include instances of the Generic PROFIBUS Interface proxy FD_GENERIC, the
corresponding GSD files are exported.

If the exported diagrams contain Automation Functions and proxies with linked documents, then the links to
these documents will also be exported.

The documents themselves can be exported using the linked document export function.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 44 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1.1.12 Exporting Macros and Compound Components

Macros and Compound Components can be exported from the project. The files which are exported can then be used
in other projects.

Macros and Compound Components can be exported by a user logged in on any client computer. The data is exported
in a file, with a Java (*.jar) file format. The file will be stored on the Application Server.

To export Macros and Compound Components, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Macro or Compound Component to be exported, from the library.

Library Nodes can also be selected. In this case the node, all subordinate Library Nodes and any
Macros and Compound Components contained in them will be exported.

2. Select the Extras menu, then Export, then Macros/Compound Components from the drop down menus.
3. The Export Macros/Compound Components dialog box appears to confirm the node or Macros to be
exported.

o Source indicates the node to be exported. This can be changed by clicking on the browse button
and selecting a new node.
o Archive File is the name of the file that will be exported.
The node name may contain illegal characters or characters that are not in the normal English character set.
In this case the characters may be replaced by underscores (_) or the node ID may be used.
4. Click on Export to export the file, otherwise click on Cancel.
5. After the file has been exported, a dialog box will appear containing summary information about errors or
warnings from the file export. To view detailed information click on the Open Protocol button to open a
protocol report browser, otherwise click on OK.

Exported files can be downloaded from the server. The files are located in the following directory:
Orion/OrionImport/, and are all of type jar archive (i.e. file extension .jar).

1.1.13 Exporting Prototypes

Prototypes can be exported from the project. The files which are exported can then be used in other projects.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 45 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Prototypes can be exported by a user logged in on any client computer. The data is exported in a file, with a Java
(*.jar) file format. The file will be stored on the Application Server, and can later be accessed and imported into other
projects.

To export Prototypes, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Prototype to be exported, from the library.

Library Nodes can also be selected. In this case the node, all subordinate Library Nodes and any
Prototypes contained in them will be exported.

2. Select the Extras menu, then Export, then Prototypes from the drop down menus.
3. The Export Prototypes dialog box appears to confirm the node or Prototype to be exported.

o Source Node/Prototype indicates the node to be exported. This can be changed by clicking on the
browse button and selecting a new node.
o Archive File is the name of the file that will be exported.
The node name may contain illegal characters or characters that are not in the normal English character set.
In this case the characters may be replaced by underscores (_) or the node ID may be used.
4. Click on Export to export the file, otherwise click on Cancel.
5. After the file has been exported, a dialog box will appear containing summary information about errors or
warnings from the file export. To view detailed information click on the Open Protocol button to open a
protocol report browser, otherwise click on OK.

Exported files can be downloaded from the server. The files are located in the following directory:
Orion/OrionImport/, and are all of type jar archive (i.e. file extension .jar).

Prototypes can be edited by the Prototype Editor.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 46 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1.1.14 Replace Prototypes

User created prototypes can be automatically replaced in plant displays. For example, if users are developing a new
version of a symbol, they can automatically replace all old versions applied in several plant displays.

To replace prototypes, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Prototype to be replaced, from the library.

2. Select the Extras menu, then Replace Prototype ..., from the drop down menu.
3. The Replace Prototype dialog box appears.

In the upper section, the Replace Prototype dialog box provides four Expression Fields:

• Old Library Node and Old Prototype display the prototype, selected in the library. These are just for
information and are displayed phantom.
• New Library Node displays a proposal for the library node, which keeps the new prototype. This can be
overwritten by the keyboard or by using the browse button.
• New Prototype displays a proposal for the name of the new prototype. This can be overwritten by the
keyboard or by using the browse button.
• The browse button opens a Prototype Chooser. Specifying a prototype in the Prototype Chooser overwrites
the New Library Node and the New Prototype boxes.

In the lower section, the two options determine whether the new prototype will be stored under the old name in the
library or not:

• Yes, old Prototype will be removed : the prototype will be overwritten. No old version is kept in the library.
• No, old Prototype won't be removed : the old prototype will be kept beside a copy of the new one (with the
new name).

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 47 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Prototypes can be edited by the Prototype Editor.

The new Prototype inherits the properties and mappings (including Special Mappings) of the old Prototype to the
extent possible.

1.1.15 Exporting Report Types

Report types can be exported from the project. The files which are exported can then be used in other projects.

Report types can be exported by a user logged in on any client computer. The data is exported in a file, with a Java
(*.jar) file format. The file will be stored on the Application Server, and can later be accessed and imported into other
projects.

To export report types, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Extras menu, then Export, then Report Type from the drop down menus.
2. The Export Report Type dialog box appears.

3. Select the Report Type to be exported from the drop down list.
4. The name of the file that will be exported is displayed in the Archive File field.
5. Click on Export to export the file, otherwise click on Cancel.
6. After the file has been exported, a dialog box will appear containing summary information about errors or
warnings from the file export. To view detailed information click on the Open Protocol button to open a
protocol report browser, otherwise click on OK.

Exported files can be downloaded from the server. The files are located in the following directory:
Orion/OrionImport/, and are all of type jar archive (i.e. file extension .jar).

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 48 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1.1.16 Exporting Signals

A list of signals can be exported for all the signal sources from any selected node in the Project Hierarchy. The list is
exported to a file which contains the following information for each signal:

• Signal Information:
o Tag Name
o Signal Item
o Signal Name
o Designation
o The signal data type.
• The Instance Id of the AF or proxy, and the Port ID of the Port that sources the signal.
• For analog signals:
o The Variation Min and Variation Max.
o The Engineering Unit (EU).
• For binary signals: The Active Alarm Text.

The file can be exported to any drive available to the Thin Client.

How to Export the Signals List

To export a list of signals, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Project Node or Function Diagram containing the signals to be exported.

The signals in all subordinate Project Nodes will be included on the signal list.

2. Select the Extras menu, then Export, then Signals from the drop down menus.
3. The Export Signals dialog box will appear.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 49 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Project Node can be changed by clicking on the browse button.

A Hierarchy Browser will then open, and a different node or diagram can be selected.

4. Enter criteria to select a set of signals in the following ways:

o Enter search patterns in the Tag Name, Tag Item, Signal Name fields

Wildcard searches can be made as follows: Enter an asterisk (*), to represent any number of
characters, or a blank. Enter an question mark (?), to represent any single character.

o Select a Data Type from the drop down list.

5. Click on the browse button beside Export File to open the file browser.
6. Select a location and enter a File name. Then select one of the available file formats. Then Save the file.
The available file formats are:
o text files (*.txt, *.csv)
o HTML files (*.html, *.htm)
o Excel files (*.xls)
7. Click on Export in the Export Signals dialog box file, otherwise click on Cancel.

A list of signals will be created.

1.2 Project Administration

Project Administration involves the use of functions required for user administration, and those required for higher level
project control.

User Administration

User administration involves assigning different tasks concerning:

• engineering
• operation
• maintenance of the I&C system

to certain groups of people.

The intent is to give appropriate allowances to personnel in accordance to their duties, responsibilities and authority.

This intent is achieved in two steps

1. Define the set of Roles.

Each of these Roles has to cover a specific task. In total all the user roles cover all activities necessary for
operation, engineering and maintenance purposes. Roles are used to define the Access Rights of Users and
Operating Working Places. A basic set of roles is predefined, like engineer, operator, administrator,
observer and supervisor. Additional roles can be defined according to individual needs.
2. Assign Roles to Users and Operator Working Places.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 50 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

After the roles are defined, each person allowed to have access to the system is registered as an individual
user. Additionally Thin Clients can be restricted with specific roles. To each of the registered users one, or if
necessary more, of the roles may be assigned, enabling them to fulfill their specific tasks and responsibilities.
It is possible to limit the authorization to a specific part of the plant, e.g. to give the authorization for operation
to a certain part of the plant to the operators. A users access rights can be further limited to specific devices
within a plant area.

The relationship between any individual user and the assigned role is controlled by the login to the system.

Safeguards are also put in place to prevent users with administration access rights from inadvertently deleting
themselves from the system.

Higher Level Project Functions

These functions are provided for higher level controls sometimes required for a project. These functions are not
intended for everyday use, but rather for problem solving in more exceptional circumstances or for setting up specific
system behavior.

These functions are:

• Disconnecting and reconnecting a Runtime Container.

• Committing and rolling back all diagrams.
• Importing and Exporting texts for localization.
• Importing temporary licenses for specialized activities.
• Configuring alarms for automatic remote dispatch via the Call Home function.

1.2.1 Administration of User Roles

To administer the user data proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Roles from the drop down menu.
2. The Roles dialog box will open.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 51 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

From this dialog box, the following activities can be carried out:

• deleting roles,
• to adding roles, or
• to copying roles, or
• editing existing roles.

1.2.1.1 Delete a Role

A role can only be deleted if it is not assigned to any user or OWP.

To delete a role open the window Roles in the Admin menu of the Project View.

For Details refer to Administration of Roles.

1. Select the role with the mouse. The role name is highlighted.
2. Press Delete Role.
3. Confirm the pop-up box with Yes, or abort the action with No.

Finally in the window Roles press the button Save to make the changes valid in the system, or press the button
Cancel to discard the changes.

1.2.1.2 Define a New Role

To define a new role open the window Roles in the Admin menu of the project view.

For Details refer to Administration of Roles.

1. Press Add Role button.

2. Enter the Role in the appearing box and press Add, or abort the command with Cancel.

Finally in the window Roles press the button Save to make the changes valid in the system, or press the button
Cancel to discard the changes.

1.2.1.3 Assign Specific Tasks to a Role

To assign specific tasks to a role, open the window Roles in the Admin menu of the Project View.

Further details are found in the Administration of Roles.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 52 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1. Select the existing role, afterwards press the button Edit Role. The Edit Roles dialog box appears (an
example is shown).

The dialog box contains a list of all the permissions that can be allocated to a role.
2. Mark the desired permission for the role by selecting the check box in the column Enable.
To remove a selection click the check box again.
3. Use the button Close for this window.
4. Finally in the window Roles press the button Save to make the changes valid in the system, or press the
button Cancel to discard the changes.

The changes will apply only after the next login with the associated role.

The column Functional Rights indicates which of the rights are classified as a not-node selective.
The classification is preset on the system implementation level and can therefore not be changed, even with
administrator rights.

For details about the permissions refer to the access rights description.

1.2.1.4 Copy an existing Role

To copy a role open the window Roles in the Admin menu of the project view, proceed as follows.

Further details are found in the Administration of Roles.

1. Select the role to copy.

2. Click on Copy Role.
3. A new window appears. Enter a new name for the role and click on Add, or abort the command with Cancel.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 53 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. Click on Save in the Roles window to complete the process. Otherwise click Cancel to discard the changes
and close the window.

The new role is created using the original role as a template. The newly created role can now be edited.

1.2.2 Operator Working Place Manager

Operator Working Places (OWPs) are predefined SPPA-T3000 Thin Clients which have specific access rights. When a
user logs in to an OWP, the access rights of the OWP are combined with the users access rights (using a logical AND).
If not restricted by a specific OWP, Thin Client access rights are defined by the Default OWP .

To manage Operator Working Places in the system, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open:

1. In the Project View select the Admin menu, then Working Place Manager.
2. The Working Place Manager dialog box will open:

From the Working Place Manager dialog box, the follows functions can be performed:

• Delete an OWP
• Create an OWP
• Copy an OWP
• Edit existing OWPs including defining the OWP Access Rights.

1.2.2.1 Remove an OWP

To remove an OWP, proceed as follows:

The Working Place Manager is open.

1. Select the OWP to delete.

2. Click on Delete OWP .
3. Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes. Otherwise click on No.

The selected OWP is deleted.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 54 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access from the Thin Client corresponding to the deleted OWP (IP address) will revert to the Default OWP
permissions.

1.2.2.2 Create an OWP

To create a new OWP to the system, proceed as follows:

The Working Place Manager is open.

1. Click on Create OWP .

2. The Working Place Properties dialog box opens:

3. Enter the OWP properties. All fields are mandatory:

o Name: Name of the OWP.
o Description: Description of the OWP.
o Network Address: IP Address of the OWP.
4. Confirm the OWP creation by clicking on Save. Otherwise click on Cancel.

The new OWP is created.

The Access Rights cannot be set until the OWP is created.

1.2.2.3 Copy an Existing OWP

To cope a new OWP to the system, proceed as follows:

The Working Place Manager is open.

1. Select the OWP to copy.

2. Click on Copy OWP .

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 55 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. The Working Place Properties dialog box opens showing the data copied from the base OWP:

To avoid duplicate OWP assignments, the OWP name is automatically changed by adding a 1 to the
end of the Name field.

4. Modify as necessary the properties of the new OWP. All fields are mandatory:
o Name: Name of the OWP.
o Description: Description of the OWP.
o Network Address: IP Address of the OWP.
5. Confirm the OWP creation by clicking on Save. Otherwise click on Cancel.

The access rights are identical to the one of the original OWP.

The OWP is copied into a new OWP definition. The Access Rights can now be modified.

1.2.2.4 Editing an OWP

To edit an OWP, proceed as follows:

The Working Place Manager is open.

1. Select the OWP to edit.

2. Click on Edit OWP .
3. The Working Place Properties dialog box will open:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 56 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. Edit the Description and/or Network Address.

The Name cannot be edited once an OWP is created.

5. Click on Access Rights to edit the access rights. The Define Access Rights dialog box will open. The OWP
Access Rights can be defined.
6. Click on Save to save the changes. Otherwise click on Cancel.

The OWP is edited.

1.2.3 Administration of Users

Specific User rights may be limited by the rights of the Operator Working Place (OWP). When a user logs in to an
OWP, the access rights of the OWP are combined with the users access rights (using a logical AND). If not restricted
by a specific OWP, Thin Client access rights are defined by the Default OWP .

To assign new users to the system login to the Workbench. From the menu Application select Project View . In the
Project View select the menu Admin, then User Manager.

A window with the actual assigned users appears:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 57 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

This window allows

• to delete a user,
• to add a user, or
• to copy a user, or
• to edit existing users.

1.2.3.1 Remove a User

To remove a user open the window User Manager in the Admin menu.

For detail refer to Administration of Users.

1. Select the login name with the mouse. The name is highlighted.
2. Press Delete User.
3. Confirm the box which subsequently appears by clicking Yes, this will immediately remove the user in the
system, or abort the command with No.

1.2.3.2 Assign a New User

To assign a new user to the system open the window User Manager in the Admin menu.

For details refer to Administration of Users.

1. Press the button Create User.

A box for editing the user properties appears:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 58 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

o Login name: mandatory; name assigned to the new user automatically populated.
o Name: optional; freely editable name of user.
o Description: mandatory; description of user.
o Password: mandatory; the password must be kept confidential to avoid misuse. When typing in the
password each character is displayed as an asterisk (*).
o Confirm password: mandatory; confirmation is necessary to ensure that there are no typing
mistakes and the user can successfully login.
o Email ID : optional; mandatory for Call Home function.
o Phone Number: optional; phone number of the user.
2. To adjust the access rights click on Access Rights.

The user must confirm that the new user data will be stored, in order to adjust the access rights. Click
on Yes to proceed.

3. Finally in the window User Properties press the button Save to make the changes valid in the system, or
press the button Cancel to discard the changes.

After this action a new user is assigned to the system with standardized settings.

Login name and password are needed to login to the system.

1.2.3.3 Copy an Existing User

To copy an existing user, open the window User Manager in the Admin menu.

For details refer to Administration of Users.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 59 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1. Select the user to be copied by marking it with the mouse.

2. Press the button Copy User.
A box for editing the user properties appears:

o Login name: mandatory; name assigned to the new user automatically populated.
o Name: optional; freely editable name of user.
o Description: mandatory; description of copied user is suggested.
o Password: mandatory; the password must be kept confidential to avoid misuse. When typing in the
password each character is displayed as an asterisk (*).
o Confirm password: mandatory; confirmation is necessary to ensure that there are no typing
mistakes and the user can successfully login.
o Email ID : optional; mandatory for Call Home function.
o Phone Number: optional; phone number of the user.
3. Finally in the window User Properties press the button Save to make the changes valid in the system, or
press the button Cancel to discard the changes.

After this action a new user is assigned to the system with standardized settings.

The access rights are identical to the one of the original user.

Login name and password are needed to login to the system.

1.2.3.4 Adjust User Data

To adjust the user data concerning Login Name, Description or Password select the item User Manager in the Admin
menu.
The window User Manager appears.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 60 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Proceed as follows:

1. Select the login name and press the button Edit User
2. The window User Properties is opened, entries can be edited.

Clicking on Access Rights will open the Define Access Rights dialog where rights can be set and edited.

Finally save the changes with the button Save or abort the action with the button Cancel.

1.2.3.5 Adjust the Access Rights for an individual user

Before you can assign a role to a user the specific role must exist.
Details are described in Administration of User Roles.

Proceed as follows:

1. Select the item User Manager in the Admin menu.

The window User Manager appears.
For details refer to Administration of Users.
2. Select the login name and press the button Edit User.
The window User Properties is opened.
3. Press the button Access Rights.
The window Define Access Rights with the actual settings appears:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 61 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The window Define Access Rights allows configuration of the access rights
o with respect to different plant areas, or
o with respect to different user roles.

A detailed explanation of the different user rights follows in Explanation of Access Rights

Adjusting the functional rights

To adjust the functional rights:

1. Open the list field Functional Rights

2. Select the desired role for the non-node-related rights

Changing the User Rights or the Access Rights Individually for Plant Areas

To add a new plant area to an existing user proceed as follows:

1. In the window Project View select the area (preferably the Node in the Tree View) and drag it into the
window Define Access Rights below the column Plant Area.
2. On releasing the mouse button the selected area and sub-areas are added to the list.
3. If the access should be allowed to only a single area, without sub-areas included, delete the asterisk * in the
respective entry:

Limiting the Access Rights to Specific Devices in a Plant Area

To grant an existing user access to a specific device proceed as follows:

1. In the window Project View select the Function Diagram containing the AF block for the device and drag it
into Define Access Rights window below the column Plant Area.
2. On releasing the mouse button the Function Diagram name and location in the Project Hierarchy are added to
the list.
3. Beside the Function Diagram name insert a forward slash i.e. '/ '.
4. In the same field specify the tagname of the device in one of the following ways:
o Explicitly enter a single tagname using the following structure:
<tagname><tag separator><tag item>

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 62 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To see the structure of the tagname open the Function Diagram in the Diagram Editor and set the
view to Show Tagname.

o Selecting several tags by using the asterisk, *, as a wildcard.

e.g. xK0 PAB00*

Editing a User Role for a Specific Plant Area

1. Click the actual role, a list drops down:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 63 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. Select the desired role.

3. Finally in the window Define Access Rights press the button Save to make the changes valid in the system,
or press the button Cancel to discard the changes.

Deleting Access Rights to a Certain Plant Area

1. Select the respective entry and press the button DELETE
2. Confirm the subsequent question with Yes or abort the changes with No.

After all changes are made close the window Define Access Rights with the button Save to make the changes valid
in the system, or press the button Cancel to discard the changes.

The changes will apply after the next login.

1.2.4 Explanation of Access Rights

Access rights for a given login session are determined by a logical combination of the User rights and the Operator
Working Place rights (using a logical AND). Access rights for both Users and OWPs are set using the Access Rights
dialog.

Applicability of Access Rights

The applicability of access rights must be distinguished between

• not-node-selective access rights and

• node-selective access rights

1. The not-node selective access rights are valid for actions which are not related to a specific node in the
Project Hierarchy. The role for not-node selective access rights is modified in the field Functional Rights.
Examples of not-node selective rights are:
o administration rights,
o creating and changing Automation Functions Blocks,
o activation of the Operation Mode for the Workbench .
2. The node selective access rights are restricted to a certain node or Plant Area. These rights are related to
operation and engineering actions like
o reviewing function diagrams
o creating and changing function diagrams

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 64 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

o operation
o simulation or forcing of signals

Table of Access Rights

The tables below give an explanation of the access rights:

Access Title Description of Access Used in View Node Selective

Right
System System administration None No
administration
System upgrade update/upgrade to new Upgrade View No
Software Releases.
(online or offline)

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 65 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Used in View Node Selective

Right
Project administration Project administration Diagnostic View: No

Button start/stop in status information of

containers enabled/disabled according to
permission.

Diagram Editor:

Tools -> Graph Layout -> Parameters

Workbench:

Multi Unit -> Attach Unit

Multi Unit -> Detach Unit

Multi Unit -> Show Unit Information

Project View:

Admin -> Runtime Container -> Start

Admin -> Runtime Container -> Stop

Admin -> Runtime Container -> Create

Admin -> Runtime Container -> Create S7

Runtime container

Admin -> Runtime Container -> Edit

Admin -> Runtime Container -> Delete

Admin -> Runtime Container -> Reconnect

Runtime Container

Admin -> Runtime Container ->

Disconnect Runtime Container

Admin -> Runtime Container -> Load S7

Execution Frame

Extras -> Project Settings -> Colors

Extras -> Project Settings -> Styles

Extras -> Project Settings -> Sounds

Extras -> Project Settings -> Document

Types

Extras -> Project Settings -> Inheritance

Rules

Extras -> Import -> Audio Clip

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:
All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
Extras -> Import -> Image
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 66 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Used in View Node Selective

Right
Printer administration Page setup for printing, Diagram Editor : Page Setup Dialog: No
and starting or stopping
alarm printers. Printer setup fields are enabled or disabled
according to permissions (affects all
diagrams in the project).

Project View :

Admin -> Alarm Printer -> Start Printing

Admin -> Alarm Printer -> Stop Printing

Alarm Printer
Archive Archive administration Project View : No
administration
Extras -> Export -> Archive Data
Storage on removable Manual burning of DVDs Project View: No
media (DVDs)
In the Swap out Archive Data dialog box,
the Burn DVD check box is enabled
Define and change Define and change user Project View : No
user rights (Change specific access rights.
login rights) Admin -> User Manager

Admin -> User Roles

Admin ->Working Place Manager

Change Call Home Change and configuration Project View : No
Configuration of the call home function.
Admin -> Call Home -> Call Home
Configurator

Admin -> Call Home -> Call Home Group

Manager
Supervisor Login Allows the user to log in a The dialog for temporary supervisor login No
temporary supervisor only lists users who have this permission.

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Set the workbench to Selection of the configuration Workbench: No
engineering mode mode in the workbench
Configuration Mode
Create and change Allows the construction or Workbench: No
automation functions, change of the following
prototypes, faceplates types: AFIs, HPs, Applications -> Prototype Editor
Faceplates, Connection
between AFIs and faceplates
Project View :

Extras -> Import -> Prototypes

Extras -> Export -> Prototypes

Extras -> Replace Prototype

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 67 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Create & change Allows the construction or Project View: No
macros, compound change of macros and
components compound components Project -> New -> Macro

If Macro or CC selected:

Project -> Commit

Project -> Rollback

Project -> Delete

Project -> Rename

Edit -> Title Block

Edit -> Open in Configuration Mode

Extras -> Import -> Macro(s)

Extras -> Export -> Macro(s)

Extras -> Convert Compound Component

to Macro

Extras -> Convert Macro to Compound

Component

Diagram Editor :

Edit -> Macro / Compound Component ->

Macro from selection

Macro from diagram

Compound Component from diagram

Convert Compound Component to Macro

If Macro or CC selected:

Edit -> Commit

Edit -> Rollback

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 68 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Create and change Selection of different types Project View No
libraries (Automation Functions,
Hardware Proxies, Project -> New -> Library Node
faceplates) from a specific
project
If Library Node selected:

Project -> Delete

Project -> Rename

Extras -> Copy and Modify (Library Node ,

Macro or CC selected)

Extras -> Import -> Automation Function

Extras -> Import -> CFC Library(currently

hidden menu)

Extras -> Assign Pictogram/Faceplate

Admin ->Runtime container ->Activate

Updated Afs

Drag & Drop of library folders, Macros or CCs

Test Prototypes Instantiate unreleased Diagram Editor : No
(Instantiate not prototypes
released Prototypes) Unreleased prototypes are only shown in the
Prototype Editor or for users with the
permission to the test unreleased prototypes.
Read function Opening of Function Project View : Yes
diagrams Diagrams in either operation
or configuration mode If function diagram selected and menu
item:Edit ->
In configuration mode the
Diagram Editor opens in Open in Configuration Mode
Read-Only mode if "Create &
Change Function Diagrams"
not set. Title Block

Copy and Modify

Export of Project Nodes and Diagrams checks,

if the user has the permission to read
diagrams in the selected folder.

Operating View:

Faceplate Button Open IC-Diagram

Change Call Home Changing Call Home Project View : No
Configuration Configuration and Group
Manager. Admin -> Call Home -> Call Home
Configurator

Admin -> Call Home -> Call Home Group

Manager

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 69 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Create and change Construction and change of Project View : Yes
function diagrams Function Diagrams
Project -> New -> Function Diagram

If function diagram selected:

Project -> Delete

Project -> Rename

Edit -> Open in Configuration Mode

Edit -> Title Block

Edit -> Diagram Assignment

Edit -> Commit

Edit -> Rollback

Edit -> Set Cycle Time

Edit -> Copy & Modify (A Project Node may

also be selected)

Extras -> Documentation -> Uncommitted

Changes

Extras -> Documentation -> Unactivated

Changes

Extras -> Import -> Spreadsheet Data

Extras -> Spreadsheet Engineering ->

Diagram Properties (if project node for
function diagram selected)

Extras -> Spreadsheet Engineering -> AF

Properties (if project node for function
diagram selected)

Extras -> Spreadsheet Engineering ->

Parameters (if project node for function
diagram selected)

Extras -> Spreadsheet Engineering ->

Parameter Values (if project node for function
diagram selected)

Extras -> Spreadsheet Engineering ->

Pictogram Properties (if project node for
function diagram selected)

Import of Project Nodes, diagrams hardware

engineering checks, if the user has the
permission to change diagrams in the selected
Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 folder. Version:
All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
Synchronization of the IO-List database
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 70 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Change the graphic of Changing free graphics and Project View : Yes
function diagrams moving objects in Function
(x/y-coordinates, free Diagrams If function diagram selected and menu
graphic) item:Edit ->

Open in Configuration Mode

Title Block

Copy and Modify

Edit -> Commit

Edit -> Rollback

Extras -> Documentation -> Uncommitted

Changes

Extras -> Find Open Function Diagram

Connections

Diagram Editor :

Edit -> Commit

Edit -> Rollback

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 71 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Create and change Construction and change of Project View : Yes
plant displays Plant Displays
If Plant Display selected:

Project -> Delete

Project -> Rename

Edit -> Open in Configuration mode

Edit -> Title Block

Edit -> Commit (folder or Plant Display

selected)

Edit -> Rollback (folder or Plant Display

selected)

Edit -> Diagram Assignment

also:

Extras -> Documentation ->Uncommitted

Changes

Extras -> Spreadsheet Engineering ->

Diagram Properties (project node or Plant
Display selected)

Extras -> Spreadsheet Engineering ->

Pictogram Properties (project node or Plant
Display selected)

Import of Project nodes and diagrams checks,

if the user has the permission to change Plant
Displays in the selected folder

Drag & Drop of Plant Displays

Dialog for new function diagrams: Creation of

an assigned Plant Display and direct assigning
to an existing Plant Display check this
permission

Diagram Editor : Read-Only mode

Edit -> Commit (folder or Plant Display

selected)

Edit -> Rollback (folder or Plant Display

selected)

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 72 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Change the plant Construction and change of Project View : Yes
hierarchy the plant hierarchy
Project -> New -> Project Node

Project -> Delete (project node selected)

Project -> Rename (project node selected)

Edit -> Title Block (project node selected)

Edit -> Set System Diagram Root

Edit -> Copy and Modify (project node

selected)

Import of Project nodes and diagrams

hardware engineering checks, if the user has
the permission to change the hierarchy
underneath the selected folder

In the Copy and Modify dialog the Start button

is dimmed according to the users permission
to change the hierarchy underneath the
destination folder.

Drag & Drop of project nodes

Change the plant Construction and change of Plant Display Hierarchy : No
display hierarchy the Plant Display hierarchy
Edit -> Reset Hierarchy

Edit -> Delete single Plant Display

Edit -> Delete Plant Display with all

underlying Plant Displays

Move Plant Displays

Drag & Drop new Plant Displays from Project

View

The Dialog defining the settings of partial plant

display hierarchy root only allows to change
the visibility for the current user, if the the user
doesn't have this permission.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 73 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Change the system Allows the configuration of Project View : Yes
configuration the software structure, e.g.
the assignment of AFIs to a Edit -> Assign Runtime Container
runtime container
Edit -> Sound Alarm Groups

Edit -> Print Alarm Groups

Spreadsheet engineering of diagrams checks

the permission to enable/ disable the changing
of the runtime container assignment
Change parameters Allows the change of Diagram Editor : (selected function diagram) Yes
(Level 1) parameters (e.g. operator
changeable limits) Edit parameters in parameter dialog

Operating View:

Force values in force dialog.

Set right to faceplate

Point View:

Edit Parameters

Force Values
Change parameters Allows the change of Diagram Editor : (selected function diagram) Yes
(Level 2) parameters (set point
adjustment, controller tuning) Edit parameters in parameter dialog

Operating View:

Force values in force dialog

Set right to faceplate

Point View:

Edit Parameters

Force Values

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 74 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Change parameters Allows the change of Diagram Editor : (selected function diagram) Yes
(Level 3) parameters (third level of
protection) Edit parameters in parameter dialog

Operating View:

Force values in force dialog

Set right to faceplate

Point View:

Edit Parameters

Force Values

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 75 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Activate and Activate or deactivate Project View : Yes
deactivate changes changes in diagrams and
Plant Displays Edit -> S7 -> S7 Hardware Configuration

Edit -> S7 -> Load S7 Hardware

Edit -> S7 -> Load S7 Connections

Edit -> S7 -> FM458 ->

Compile/Download/Start FM458

Edit -> S7 -> FM458 -> Select Master Rack

Edit -> S7 -> Failsafe System ->

Compile/Download/Start Failsafe system

Edit -> S7 -> Failsafe System -> Edit Safety

Program

Edit -> S7 -> Failsafe System -> Edit Safety

Parameters

Edit -> Preview Activation

Edit -> Activate

Edit -> Deactivate

Edit -> Commit last activation: only, if project

container configuration is not changed to auto
commit mode

Edit -> Rollback last activation: only, if project

container configuration is not changed to auto-
commit mode

Extras -> Documentation -> Unactivated

Changes

Diagram Editor :

Edit -> Preview Activation

Edit -> Activate

Edit -> Deactivate

Point View:

Preview Activation

Commit Last Activation

Rollback Last Activation

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 76 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Create Project Create a project version Project View : No
Version (copy of the project data)
Versioning -> Create Project Version
Compare Project Compare the current project Project View : No
Versions with a saved version
Versioning -> Compare Project Version
Manual Scheduling Manual scheduling related Diagram Editor : No
operations (for Diagrams in
Project View and AFIs in Extras -> Manual Scheduling (Either a
Editor) Function Diagram or a CC is open)

Extras -> Activate Manual Scheduling (A

Function Diagram is open)

Extras -> Open Scheduling Table (Either a

Function Diagram or a CC is open)

Project View :

Edit -> Manual Scheduling -> Activate

Diagram Scheduling

Edit -> Manual Scheduling -> Activate

Internal Diagram Scheduling

Edit -> Manual Scheduling -> Open

Scheduling Table

Access Title Description of Access Used in View Node

Right Selective
Set the Workbench to operation mode Selection of the Workbench : No
operation mode of the
workbench Operation mode

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 77 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Used in View Node

Right Selective
Read plant displays Monitoring of Plant Project View : Yes
Displays. In
configuration mode Edit -> Open in
the diagram editor Operation Mode
opens in Read-only (Plant Display
mode when Create & selected)
Change plant
displays? is not set.
Edit -> Open in
Configuration Mode
(Plant Display
selected)

Edit -> Title Block

(Plant Display
selected)

Edit -> Copy and

Modify (Plant Display
selected)

Export of Project
nodes and diagrams
checks, if the user has
the permission to read
diagrams in the
selected folder

Operating View:

Open Plant Display

Automatic / manual selection Automatic and manual Operating View: Yes
selection
Set right to faceplate
Operate Operation of Operating View: Yes
Automation Functions
(e.g. start / stop) Set right to faceplate
Adjust setpoints Adjusting setpoints in Operating View: Yes
Faceplates
Set right to faceplate
Single Step Operation of a sub- Operating View: Yes
loop controller when a
condition is missing Set right to faceplate
Commissioning Operating the Operating View: Yes
commissioning mode
button in a Faceplate Set right to faceplate
Tag Out Operating the tag out Operating View: Yes
mode button in a
Faceplate Set right to faceplate
Close Loop Operating the closed Operating View: Yes
loop mode button in a
Faceplate Set right to faceplate
Manual Track Operation of Operating View: Yes
Automation Functions
to reset fault Set right to faceplate
conditions

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 78 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Used in View Node

Right Selective
Maintenance Allows operation of Operating View: Yes
OH_COUNT and
SC_COUNT Set right to faceplate
Faceplates
Acknowledge alarms Acknowledgment of Operating View: Yes
single alarms, alarm
pages and alarm Set right to faceplate
groups
Alarm Sequence
Display :

Point View:
Acknowledge
System logging Configuration and Diagnostic View : No
selection of logs.
Register Tab Logging
is enabled/disabled
according to right.

Remote diagnosis
button of containers is
en/disabled according
to right.
Change notes Allows changes of Operating View: Yes
notes of other users
(editing and deleting) Delete button in
Notes Dialog is
en/disabled according
to right.

Notepad is opened in
ReadOnly mode
according to right.
Force Ports Changes of Project View : Yes
Automation Functions
input / output values Extras ->
by manually input Documentation -
>Forced ports

Extras ->Import-
>Forced Ports

Operating View:

Faceplate Button

Force Ports (in

Dynamic Function
Diagrams)

Point View:

Read only mode of

Forcing sheet.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 79 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Used in View Node

Right Selective
Acknowledgement alarms globally on plant displays Acknowledgment of Operating View: Yes
all alarms of a Plant
Display, e.g. during Button: Acknowledge
commissioning phase all alarms of plant
display
Silence alarm sound on all machines Silence sound alarms Operating View: No
on all clients
Button: Silence
audible alarm on all
machines
Temporary Threshold Create temporary No
thresholds
Configuration Trend Display Configure user User defined trends Yes
defined Trend can only be placed on
Displays user defined plant
displays where there
may not be any
restrictions for the
current user -> Not
implemented
View Lifetime Calculation Open the Fatigue Workbench : No
Monitoring System
browser Applications ->
Lifetime Calculation
View TDY Allows the opening of Workbench : No
the TDY tool
Applications -> TDY

Access Title Description of Access Used in View Node

Right Selective
Open Reports Opening of the reports Workbench : Yes
system
Applications -> Reports

Project View :

With a Report Definition selected:

Edit -> Open in Operation Mode

Edit -> Copy and Modify (Report Definition or Point

Group selected)

Drag and drop of Point Groups or Report Definitions

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 80 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Used in View Node

Right Selective
Edit report Editing and storing of Project View : No
definitions report definitions
Project -> New -> Point Group

Project -> New -> Report Definition

Project -> Delete (point group or report definition

selected)

Project -> Rename (point group or report definition

selected)

Edit -> Open in Operation Mode (report definition

selected)

Edit -> Open in Configuration Mode (point group or

report definition selected)

Edit -> Title Block (point group or report definition

selected)

Edit -> Commit (point group or report definition selected)

Edit -> Rollback (point group or report definition selected)

Edit -> Copy and Modify (point group or report definition

selected)

Extras -> Documentation -> Uncommitted Changes

Import of Project nodes and diagrams checks, if the user

has the permission to edit reports in the selected folder

Drag & Drop of point groups or report definitions

Edit reports Editing and storing of Report View Yes
reports queries
Edit Report Edit Report Archive Report View No
Archive
Edit Report Edit Report Types Project View : Yes
Types
Extras -> Import -> Report Type

Extras -> Export -> Report Type

Extras -> Delete -> Report Type

Report View

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Select auto Switch on/off of auto alarm acknowledgement Alarm Sequence Display No
acknowledgment function

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 81 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Suppress alarms for Suppression of alarms. The suppressed alarms Operating View Yes
display are no longer shown in the alarm sequence
display Point View: Suppress
Display

Alarm Sequence Display

Suppress alarms for Suppression of alarms or other Automation Operating View Yes
display and archive Functions outputs. The suppressed signals are
no longer archived or shown in the alarm Point View: Suppress
sequence display
Alarm Sequence Display
View alarms View alarms within the alarm sequence display Alarm Sequence Display Yes

Selection of displayed
alarms

Workbench :

Applications -> Alarm

Sequence Display ->
Default ASD

Applications -> Alarm

Sequence Display -> New
Alarm Sequence Display

Applications -> Alarm

Sequence Display ->
Delete Alarm Sequence
Display

Operating View:

Faceplate button for

CRASD (see 4.1.6)

Context menu item for

CRASD in dynamic function
diagram

Context menu item for

CRASD in dynamic plant
display(see 4.1.6)

Access Title Description of Access Right Used in View Node

Selective
Read Access to all diagnostic data: Detail diagnosis is allowed Workbench : No
diagnostic wherever the user had the permission to open the Alarm
data Sequence display, faceplate or point view containing a button to Applications ->
open the detail diagnosis Diagnostic View

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 82 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1.2.4.1 Adjust the Access Rights for a User or OWP

Adjusting the access rights requires either that the Working Place Properties or User Properties dialog box is open.

Before you can assign a role to a user or OWP the specific Role must exist or be created.

1. Click on Access Rights.

2. The Define Access Rights dialog box will open:

Access Rights can be set for Functional Rights or Plant Area Rights.

A detailed explanation of the different user rights follows in Explanation of Access Rights

3. After all changes are made, click on Save to make the changes valid in the system, or click on Cancel to
discard the changes.

The changes will apply after the next login.

The Access Rights are adjusted.

Adjusting the Functional Rights

To adjust the Functional Rights, proceed as follows:

1. Select the not-node-related Functional Rights from the drop down list.
2. Click on Save to save. Otherwise click on Cancel.

The Functional Rights are adjusted.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 83 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Adding a Specific Plant Area

Access rights must be assigned to specific plant areas and specific devices, or, if desired, the plant as a whole. To add
a new plant area, proceed as follows:

1. In the Project View , select the area (preferably the Node in the Tree View) and drag it into the window
Define Access Rights below the column Plant Area.
2. On releasing the mouse button the selected area and sub-areas are added to the list.
3. If the access should be allowed to only a single area, without sub-areas included, delete the asterisk * in the
respective entry:

The new Plant Area is added to the list and can now have specific access rights assigned to it.

Adding a Specific Device for Access Rights

To add a specific device for access right restriction, proceed as follows:

1. In the Project View , select the Function Diagram containing the AF block for the device and drag it into
Define Access Rights window below the column Plant Area.
2. On releasing the mouse button the Function Diagram name and location in the Project Hierarchy are added to
the list.
3. Beside the Function Diagram name insert a forward slash i.e. '/ '.
4. In the same field specify the tagname of the device in one of the following ways:
o Explicitly enter a single tagname using the following structure:
<tagname><tag separator><tag item>

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 84 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To see the structure of the tagname open the Function Diagram in the Diagram Editor and set the
view to Show Tagname.

o Selecting several tags by using the asterisk, *, as a wildcard.

e.g. xK0 PAB00*

The new Device is added to the Plant Area list and can now have specific access rights assigned to it.

Adjusting the Plant Access Rights

To adjust the Plant Access Rights, proceed as follows:

If a given right is granted for the superordinate node, that right is available to all subordinate nodes.

This is true even if that right is restricted by the Role given to the subordinate node.

In order to restrict a right in the subordinate node, that right must not be granted to the superordinate node.

1. For the desired Plant Area, select the node-related Role from the drop down list:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 85 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. Click on Save to save. Otherwise click on Cancel.

The Plant Area Access Rights are adjusted.

Deleting Access Rights to a Certain Plant Area

To delete a Plant Access Right, proceed as follows:

1. Select the Plant Area whose access needs to be removed from the list and click on Delete. The Plant Area
is removed from the list.
2. Click on Save to save.

The Plant Area Access Rights are adjusted.

1.2.5 Administrator Safeguards

Various safeguards are required to prevent users who are performing administration duties from inadvertently
removing their own access to the system. These safeguards prevent a situation from arising where a project no longer
has an administrator. In this case no users could be added or removed, or their access rights changed.

These safeguards are implemented for any user that is assigned the access right: Define and change user rights.
The system prevents such users from:

• Deleting themselves via the user manager.

• Adjusting their own functional rights, if the new user role does not include the access right: Define and
change user rights.
• Deleting the user role to which their functional rights have been assigned.
• Removing the access right Define and change user rights from the user role to which their functional rights
have been assigned.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 86 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1.2.6 Disconnecting and Reconnecting a Runtime Container

Disconnecting or Reconnecting a Runtime Container is not a commonplace activity, and is not recommended
at a running plant.

The implications for disconnecting and reconnecting Runtime Containers depend on the type of Runtime Container.
Both types are described below:

For S7 Runtime Containers

Disconnecting an S7 Runtime Container will terminate the execution of all Automation Functions. All output values for
modules in the affected ET200M stations will be frozen.

The disconnection is triggered by a user action, that means, the user can decide, at which state of the process the
function should be executed.

The disconnection should only be used for initializing a SIMATIC S7 CPU, that has been added to the system or if an
irreparable system fault has appeared.

For S7 Runtime Containers Reconnecting will cause a reinitialization of the hardware proxies with the current
values, which are available.

The procedures for disconnecting and reconnecting a Runtime Container are described below:

For Other Runtime Containers

The following description is valid for:

• Non Realtime Runtime Containers

• OPC Client Containers
• Management Containers

Disconnecting or Reconnecting a Runtime Container is only performed in exceptional circumstances. The user must
be aware that the execution of the Runtime Container could be interrupted, and many system features will be
bypassed or overridden (especially those involving Project and Runtime Container consistency).

When a Runtime Container is disconnected, it continues running but engineering changes committed in the Project
Container will not be reflected in the Runtime Container. The Runtime Container continues to run and process logic,
but no changes can be made to the Runtime Container. To the Project Container, the disconnected Runtime Container
is seen as a dummy and engineering changes can still be made, no consistency checks are made.

When a Runtime Container is reconnected it is completely restarted. The complete configuration is reloaded from the
Project Container. After the Runtime Container has been reconnected the consistency checks return to normal and
functions are no longer bypassed or overridden.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 87 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The procedures for disconnecting and reconnecting a Runtime Container are described below:

How to Disconnect or Reconnect a Runtime Container

These functions are only available for users with suitable user rights.

Disconnecting a Runtime Container

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Runtime Container , then Disconnect Runtime Container from the drop
down menu.
2. A dialog box appears.
3. Select the Runtime Container to be disconnected from the drop down list.

4. Click on Disconnect to disconnect the Runtime Container, otherwise click on Cancel.

5. The Confirm Disconnection dialog box will appear.
6. Click on Yes to disconnect the selected Runtime Container, otherwise click on No.

The selected Runtime Container will be disconnected.

Reconnecting a Runtime Container

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Runtime Container , then Reconnect Runtime Container from the drop
down menu.
2. A dialog box appears.
3. Select the Runtime Container to be reconnected from the drop down list.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 88 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Only disconnected Runtime Containers are displayed in the drop down menu.

4. Click on Reconnect to reconnect the Runtime Container, otherwise click on Cancel.

The selected Runtime Container will be reconnected.

1.2.7 Activate Updated Automation Functions

The Activate Updated Automation Functions is used to do an online update of a Runtime Container. There are two
situations which require a Runtime Container to be updated:

• A file containing runtime information for new or updated Automation Functions is being imported.
• An SPPA-T3000 upgrade has been performed. After a system upgrade an update of the S7 Execution Frame
is necessary. The procedure described here performs the update online.

How to Update a Runtime Container

The Project View is open. An AF update file has been imported or an SPPA-T3000 system upgrade has been
performed.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Runtime Container , then Activate Updated AFs from the drop down menus.

This step is not necessary if an AF import is being carried out since the Activate Updated AFs
function is automatically started.

2. The dialog box Activate Update AFs appears. This is a list of all Runtime Containers in the system.
If an AF import is being carried out the Contains Imported AFs check boxes will be selected for all the
Runtime Containers which support the AF types being imported.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 89 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Select a single Runtime Container to be upgraded.

It is recommended to upgrade only one Runtime Container one at a time.

4. Click on Activate to updated the Runtime Container online, otherwise click on Cancel.
5. The Activate Result box appears.

Click on the Open Protocol button to open a Protocol Report Browser for further information.
6. Click on OK to update the Runtime Container and close the box.
7. After the update the Runtime Container will remain in the list. If the Contains Imported AFs check box was
selected before the update, it will now appear as deselected.

The contents of the dialog box can be exported or printed.

8. Select the next Runtime Container to be updated and then repeat the steps to Activate the updated AFs.
9. When all affected Runtime Containers have been updated click on Close to close the dialog box.

The imported information becomes active immediately in the system.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 90 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Updates to currently executing AFs become active immediately in the system after the Runtime Container has
been updated. Ensure that any necessary precautions have been taken prior to updating the Runtime
Containers containing the AFs (e.g. informing operating staff of the change, or ensuring relevant controls are
put into manual where required).

The update of a non S7 Runtime Container is also possible by stopping it and afterwards starting it again in
diagnostic view.

Another AF import is only possible, after all of the affected Runtime Containers have been updated.

1.2.8 Committing and Rolling Back All Diagrams

Committing or Rolling Back all diagrams is not a commonplace activity, and is only performed in special cases.

Sometimes, in exceptional circumstances, a user with the appropriate access rights may have to commit or rollback all
the diagrams in a project. This could occur for example when uncommitted changes exist, but the user who made the
changes is unavailable to activate them.

Committing and rolling back all diagrams works in the same way as discussed in transaction handling, except that:

• The multiuser access measures are overridden, all changes made by all users will be committed or rolled
back.
• Both Function Diagram and Plant Display changes are committed or rolled back.

Committing All Diagrams

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Commit All from the drop down menu.
2. A dialog box appears to confirm the action. To commit all diagrams click on Yes, otherwise click on No.

Rolling Back All Diagrams

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Rollback All from the drop down menu.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 91 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. A dialog box appears to confirm the action. To rollback all diagrams click on Yes, otherwise click on No.

1.2.9 Exporting Texts for Localizing

Prior to localizing activities, the texts must be exported from the system. The user can select the language in which the
texts to be exported, and the system components that are to be localized.

To export the file containing texts for localizing, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Localized Texts, then Export from the drop down menus.
2. The Export Localized Texts dialog box will open.

3. Select a Language from the drop down list. This language is the source language that will be used for
localizing (i.e. the source language that will be localized from).
4. Select a Category from the drop down list, either the:
o System User Interface, or the
o Library.

If both categories are to be localized, they must be exported separately.

5. Select the export file in the File Name field. For this, click on the browse button on the right hand side of the
field, a browser will then open for entry of the file name.
6. Click on Export to export the file, otherwise click on Cancel. During the export, the progress is reported in a
dialog box.

The file will be exported and can be localized.

1.2.10 Importing Localized Texts

Following localizing activities, the texts must be imported into the system.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 92 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

An online help for the system can be imported in the same way. This file will have a .jar file extension.

To import a file containing localized texts, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Localized Texts, then Import from the drop down menus.
2. The Import Localized Texts dialog box will open.

3. Select a Language from the drop down list. This language identifies the language for the localized text that is
being imported.

The category of the import file (i.e. System User Interface, Library or online help) is automatically
recognized by the system.

4. Select the import file in the File Name field. For this, click on the browse button on the right hand side, a
browser will then open for entry of the file name.
5. For the system default languages (i.e. English (United States) and German (Germany)), the user has the
option of returning these components to their delivered states (if changes have been made). Tick Reset to
Default and select the system component to be reset from the drop down list.
6. Click on Import to import the file, otherwise click on Cancel.
7. A dialog box reports on the progress of the import.

If the language already exists in the system, the user is given the option of whether or not the old
data will be overwritten.

The file will be imported and the new language becomes available in the system.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 93 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1.2.11 Import Temporary License

The Import Temp. License menu is used to import temporary licenses to enable specialized system functionality.

1.2.11.1 Enable Service Level

To make service level information available in the system via importing a temporary license, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Import Temp. Licenses, then Enable service level... from the drop down
menus.
2. The Enable Service Level dialog box will open.

3. Enter the path and name for the license file in the License File field. Alternatively, click on the browse button
(on the right hand side of the License File field) to browse for the file.
4. Select the temporary license file from the browser window.
5. Click on Import to import the file, otherwise click on Cancel.

The license will be imported and the service level information will be available within the system.

1.2.11.2 Enable Compound Component Access Mode

The Enable Compound Component Access Mode function is used to install a temporary Compound Component
license

To load a temporary Compound Component license file proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Import Temp. License, then Enable Compound Component Access Mode
from the drop down menus.
2. The Compound Component Access Mode dialog appears.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 94 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Click on the browse button (on the right hand side for the License File field) to find the *.lic file using the
browser.
4. Click on Import to import the license, otherwise click on Cancel.
The access rights of the temporary license will be immediately active for the user.

The import will not be carried out if the CC with the same GUID as the license does not exist or if the CC does
not require a license.

Temporary Compound Component licenses are only available for Siemens service personnel.

1.2.12 Engineering Logs

Enabling Engineering Logs starts the tracking of engineering based changes made by SPPA-T3000 users. The
changes are stored in the system archive. The tracked changes can be viewed by generating a Log of Engineering
Changes report.

To enable or disable Engineering Logs proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Engineering Logs, from the drop down menu.
2. SPPA-T3000 will toggle between archiving engineering changes and non archiving engineering changes.

A tick beside Engineering Logs indicates that tracking of engineering change is enabled.

1.2.12.1 Which Engineering Changes are Tracked?

The following table lists the engineering actions that are logged in the archive when Engineering Logs is on. This
data is available to be displayed on the Log of Engineering Changes report.

Type Actions Object Name Value

Session Login User Name IP
Logout Address
Failed login
Login supervisor
Logout supervisor
Engineering Log On Container Name
Off

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 95 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Type Actions Object Name Value

Container Create Container Name
Delete
Modify
Connect
Start
Stop
Disconnect
Recover
TempStart (i.e. started in Diagnostic View)
TempStop (i.e. stopped in Diagnostic View)
S7 HW Config HW Config Container Name
Load HW
Load Execution Frame
Import Localized Text Local Name
HW Import File Name
Spreadsheet Import
Project Node
Report Type
Prototype Create Prototype Name
Delete
Modify
Replace
Import
(Note: When a Prototype is moved the logged
actions are Delete and Create)
(Diagnostic View) Modify Container Name
Logging
AF Type Import Type Name
Modify
System Root Set Root Root Name
HMI (Plant Display) Create Node Plant Display Name
Hierarchy Delete Node
Modify Node (i.e. move)
Reset Hierarchy
Project Hierarchy Move Node Node Name
Rename Node
I&C Diagram Create Function Diagram Name
Delete
Modify
Activate
Deactivate
Plant Display Create Plant Display Name
Delete
Modify
Activate
Report Definition Create Report Name
Delete
Modify
Activate
Point Group Create Point Group Name
Delete
Modify
Activate
Sound Alarm Group Create Sound Alarm Group Name
Delete
Modify
Print Group Alarm Create Print Alarm Group Name
Delete
Modify

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 96 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Type Actions Object Name Value

User Create User Name
Delete
Modify
Commit Commit
Rollback
Commit all Users
Alarm Type Create Alarm Type Name
Delete
Modify
Color Create Color Name
Delete
Modify
Parameter Force (i.e. Force and Unforce) Tag and Port Name Paramet
Modify (i.e. online parameter change or er Value
activation)
Access Right Create User Name Plant
Delete Area and
Modify User
Role
IC Module Activate Tag Name
Deactivate
Connection Activate Tag and Port Names of Source
Deactivate and Destination
Call Home Initialize Receiver Details
Signal Name
Alarm ID

The user name and a time stamp is recorded with each logged action.

1.2.13 Call Home Function

The Call Home function enables the system to generate and dispatch email messages concerning alarm events. The
messages contain the details of the alarm raised, diagnostic information and details about the sender.

Alarm notifications via email can be triggered two ways:

1. Automatic dispatch based on preconfigured rules.

2. Manual dispatch from the ASD.

Messages can be sent to plant management, operators or maintenance staff to alert them to important events.
Additionally the messages can be configured to be sent to the Siemens Remote Expert Center for service support.

This section describes the necessary steps to preconfigure the automatic dispatch of alarm notifications. The manual
dispatch of alarm data is described with the ASD.

The Call Home function requires the creation of a Call Home Container in the Administration Console.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 97 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1.2.13.1 Call Home Configurator

The automatic dispatch of alarm notifications via email is configured using the Call Home Configurator. After Call
Home is configured, email messages will be automatically sent to the chosen recipients (members of the selected
subscriber group) when a configured alarm is raised.

To configure the Call Home function, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Call Home, then Call Home Configurator from the drop down menus.

The Call Home Configurator will not be accessible if the user does not have the appropriate Access
Rights.

2. The Select Group dialog box will open.

If no subscriber groups exist, an error dialog box will appear. In that case, a subscriber group must
first be created.

3. Select the group to configure from the drop down list. This is the subscriber group to be assigned alarms.
4. Click Modify to open the Call Home Configurator.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 98 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Call Home Configurator is now open and displays the current alarm subscriptions. The alarm subscriptions can
be modified (add or remove alarms) and the members of the subscriber group can be modified.

Modify Alarm Subscriptions

To modify the alarms assigned to a subscriber group, proceed as follows:

The Call Home Configurator is open.

1. Select the node to search using the browse button (on the right hand side of the Selected Node field).
2. If desired, modify the Search Pattern using Tag, Item and Match Case.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 99 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Specific Alarm Types may be filtered during the search by selecting the Find Alarms check box.

3. Click Start Search to display the results.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 100 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. Signals may be added to or removed from the subscriber group by selecting the signal and then clicking the
buttons:
o Add Item

o Remove Item

o Add All

o Remove All

Alternatively, add or remove signals via the context menu (right mouse click > Add Item, etc. ) after
selecting the signal.

5. To begin a new search click Start Search.

6. When subscription assignment is complete click Save. Otherwise click Cancel to close the Call Home
Configurator.

The contents of the dialog box can be printed.

The new Call Home subscriptions are now configured.

Modify Group Members

Clicking on Configure Subscribers will open the Subscriber Manager dialog box.

1.2.13.1.1 Subscriber Manager

Subscriber groups define a list of email recipients for the Call Home function. To modify a Call Home subscriber group,
proceed as follows:

The Subscriber Manager dialog box is open.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 101 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1. Subscribers may be added to the subscriber group by selecting the user from the Available Users and then
clicking the button:
o Add user to group when a single user is selected.

o Add all users to group when multiple users are selected.

Only users with an email address assigned under user administration can be added to a subscription
group.

2. Subscribers may be removed from the subscriber group by selecting the user from the Associated Users
and then clicking the button:
o Remove user from group when a single user is selected.

o Remove all users from group when multiple users are selected.

Alternatively, add or remove users via the context menu (right mouse click > Add User, etc. ) after
selecting the user.

3. When user assignment is complete click Save. Otherwise click Cancel to close the Subscriber Manager
dialog box.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 102 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The change to the subscriber group is complete.

1.2.13.2 Group Manager

Before signals may be assigned using the Call Home Configurator, a subscriber group must be created. The Group
Manager is also used to modify, rename and delete the Call Home subscriber groups.

To manage Call Home subscriber groups, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Call Home, then Call Home Group Manager from the drop down menus.

The Call Home Group Manager will not be accessible if the user does not have the appropriate
Access Rights.

2. The Group Manager dialog box will open.

If no subscriber groups exist, the Existing Groups list will be empty.

Subscriber groups can now be deleted, created, configured and modified.

Delete Group

To delete a subscriber group, proceed as follows:

The Group Manager is open.

1. Select the group in the Existing Groups list.

2. Click Delete Group.
3. Confirm the deletion in the Delete Group dialog box by clicking Yes or cancel by clicking No.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 103 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The subscriber group is deleted and is removed from the Existing Groups list.

Create Group

To create a subscriber group, proceed as follows:

The Group Manager is open.

1. Click Create Group.

2. The New Group dialog box will open:

3. Enter the Group Name.

4. Click Create Group or cancel by clicking Cancel.

The new subscriber group is created and appears in the Existing Groups list.

Configure Subscriber

To configure a subscriber group, proceed as follows:

The Group Manager is open.

1. Select the subscriber group from the Existing Groups list.

2. Click Configure Subscribers.
3. The Subscriber Manager dialog box will open.

The group can now be modified using the Subscriber Manager.

Rename Group

To rename a subscriber group, proceed as follows:

The Group Manager is open.

1. Select the subscriber group from the Existing Groups list.

2. Click Rename Group.
3. The Rename Group dialog box will open:

4. Enter the Group Name.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 104 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

5. Click Rename Group or cancel by clicking Cancel.

The subscriber group is renamed and appears in the Existing Groups list.

1.2.13.3 Send General Data

General data can be sent via email from the workbench to configured users. The data can consist of comments and a
file attachment.

To send general data to a user, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Admin menu, then Call Home, then Send General Data from the drop down menus.
2. The General Data dialog box will open.

3. Click on the browse button (on the right hand side of the To field) to select the recipients.
4. The Receiver Selection dialog box will open.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 105 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

5. Receivers may be added as email recipients by selecting the user from the Available Users and then clicking
the button:
o Select user when a single user is selected.

o Select all users when multiple users are selected.

Only users with an email address assigned under user administration can be added as an email
recipient.

6. Receivers may be removed as email recipients by selecting the user from the Associated Users and then
clicking the button:
o Remove user from selection when a single user is selected.

o Remove all users from selection when multiple users are selected.

Alternatively, add or remove recipients via the context menu (right mouse click > Select User, etc. )
after selecting the user.

7. Click OK to confirm the selection and close the window. Otherwise click Cancel to cancel without modifying
the recipients.
8. Enter text in the Comments field to accompany the data.

There is a 1000 character size limit for comments.

9. Enter an Attachment by typing in the filename, or click on the browse button (on the right hand side of the
field) to find the attachment using a browser.

There is a 1 MB size limit for attachments.

10. Click Send to send the data. Otherwise click Cancel to cancel without modifying the recipients.

The general data is sent to the selected recipients.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 106 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 107 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2 Plant Display Hierarchy View

Usually the Plant Displays, as well as the Function Diagrams, are hierarchically organized . The Plant Display
Hierarchy, visible to the operator, is independent of the Project Hierarchy. The Project Hierarchy is shown in the
Project View, whereas the Plant Display Hierarchy is to be edited in the Plant Display Hierarchy editor.

2.1 Starting the View

Before the Plant Display Hierarchy is available for the first time, it needs to be initialized. A precondition is that Plant
Displays have been created.

After the SPPA-T3000 Workbench is started, select Applications > Plant Display Hierarchy View. The editor window
for the hierarchy view is opened.
If the window is empty, the Plant Display Hierarchy has not been initialized before or the displays have been deleted.
In that case reset the Plant Display Hierarchy as described in Resetting the Plant Display Hierarchy.

2.1.1 Exiting the View

To exit the Plant Display Hierarchy View:

• Select the File menu, then Exit from the drop down menu.

Alternatively the Plant Display Hierarchy View can be closed via the standard window close button.

2.2 General Layout

The Plant Display Hierarchy View has the following layout:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 108 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Modifications to the Plant Display Hierarchy are possible when the Plant Display Hierarchy View is open in
engineering mode. The mode is displayed in the title bar (i.e. (Engineering)).

For editing the Plant Display Hierarchy the following menu items and command buttons are available:

1. File menu:
o Menu item Exit:
For details refer to Exiting the View.
This function can also be selected with the button

2. Edit menu:
o Menu item Delete Single Plant Display.
This function can also be selected with the button

o Menu item Delete Plant Display with all subordinate Plant Displays.
This function can also be selected with the button

o Menu item Reset Hierarchy:

For details refer to Reset Plant Display Hierarchy.
This function can also be selected with the button

o Menu item Partial Hierarchy Root.

This function can also be selected with the button

3. View menu:
o Menu item Toolbars:
For details refer to Plant Display Hierarchy Toolbar.
4. Extras menu:
o Menu item Find Partial Hierarchy Roots:
For details refer to Find Partial Hierarchy Roots.
This function can also be selected with the button

5. The menu item Help

provides further menu items, supporting you to get further SPPA-T3000 specific information

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 109 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2.2.1 Toolbar
The Plant Display Hierarchy View has one toolbar available, called the Default Toolbar. This toolbar can be
customized by the user.

To make the Default Toolbar visible in the view select it as follows:

The Plant Display Hierarchy View is open.

1. Select the View menu, then Toolbars from the drop down menu.
2. A further drop down menu appears with the Default Toolbar in the menu.
3. To select or deselect the toolbar, click on it in the drop down menu. When the toolbar is selected it has a tick
next to it in the menu.

2.3 Multi User Operation

Several users may work in the Plant Display Hierarchy View simultaneously. Multi user access to diagrams is
controlled as follows:

• Any user (with the appropriate access rights) can view or edit the Plant Display Hierarchy.
• Should any user make a change to the Plant Display Hierarchy, the views of all users are updated with the
change.

2.4 Delete Single Plant Display

If it is necessary to delete a single Plant Display from the hierarchy proceed as follows:

1. The editor window for the hierarchy view is opened and the Plant Displays can be seen.

When the window is empty the Plant Display Hierarchy has not been initialized before or the displays
have been deleted.
In that case reset the Plant Display Hierarchy as described in Resetting the Plant Display Hierarchy.

2. Select a diagram in the Tree View of the hierarchy and remove the diagram with one of the following
commands:
o select the Edit menu, then Delete Single Plant Display from the drop down menu, or
o with the button

Deleting or reorganizing displays in the Plant Displays Hierarchy does not influence the organization of the
Plant Displays that exists in the Project View.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 110 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

It is possible to select several Plant Displays.

Select a single item, then pressing the CTRL key select more items. OR

Select a single item, then pressing the SHIFT key select another item. Both the items and all the items in
between them will be selected.

2.5 Delete Plant Displays with all underlying Plant Displays

There is an option to delete a Plant Display including all its underlying Plant Displays from the hierarchy. Proceed as
follows:

1. The editor window for the hierarchy view is opened and the Plant Displays can be seen.

When the window is empty the Plant Display Hierarchy has not been initialized before or the displays
have been deleted.
In that case reset the Plant Display Hierarchy as described in Resetting the Plant Display Hierarchy.

2. Select a diagram in the Tree View of the hierarchy and remove the diagram with one of the following
commands:
o select the Edit menu, then Delete Plant Display with all underlying Plant Displays from the drop
down menu, or
o with the button

Deleting or reorganizing displays in the Plant Displays Hierarchy does not influence the organization of the
Plant Displays, that exists in the Project View.

It is possible to select several Plant Displays.

Select a single item, then pressing the CTRL key select more items. OR

Select a single item, then pressing the SHIFT key select another item. Both the items and all the items in
between them will be selected.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 111 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2.6 Reset the Plant Display Hierarchy to Default

Various situations might require resetting the Plant Display Hierarchy to the default order. This default order is made
according to the organization of the existing Plant Displays in the Project View.

Possible reasons:

• The Plant Display Hierarchy has not been created before.

• Prior to an extensive reorganization of the Plant Display Hierarchy it could be advantageous to start with the
organization as used in the Project Hierarchy.

To reset the Plant Display Hierarchy proceed as follows:

• In the editor window for the Plant Display Hierarchy select Edit > Reset Hierarchy. This will create the
structure of the existing Plant Displays according to the Project Hierarchy as displayed in the Project View.
This is the default setting.
•

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 112 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The reset command is not limited to a certain sub area of the plant. All Plant Displays will be reset. Hence a
very few (probably only one) of the user logins for engineering activities will have the exclusive rights for a
reset of the Plant Display Hierarchy.

2.7 Insert Single Plant Displays

If it is necessary to add a single Plant Display in the Plant Display Hierarchy proceed as follows:

Both, the Project View must be opened and the editor window for the Plant Display Hierarchy must be opened in the
Workbench.

• Drag the desired Plant Display from the Project View and drop it at the desired position in the Plant Display
Hierarchy.

If the Plant Display is dragged on top of another display in the Plant Display Hierarchy it will be placed in an
subordinate layer in the hierarchy.

Deleting or reorganizing Plant Displays in the Hierarchy View does not influence the organization of Plant
Displays existing in the Project View.

It is possible to select several Plant Displays.

Select a single item, then pressing the CTRL key select more items. OR

Select a single item, then pressing the SHIFT key select another item. Both the items and all the items in
between them will be selected.

2.8 Creating a Partial Hierarchy

A Partial Hierarchy is a subhierarchy in the Plant Display Hierarchy view.

Various situations might require defining a node in the Plant Display Hierarchy as Partial Hierarchy. A possible reason
is the fast access to a Plant Display specific to the operators area of work.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 113 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To create a node as Partial Hierarchy proceed as follows:

The editor window for the hierarchy view is open and the Plant Displays can be seen.

1. Define a node in PDH as Partial Hierarchy Root.

2. Insert diagrams in the Partial Hierarchy node.

The partial hierarchies thus created can be viewed in the PDH in operation mode as separate tabs.

2.8.1 Partial Hierarchy Root

A Partial Hierarchy Root is the root node of a Partial Hierarchy. It needs to be defined to display it in the operation
mode as a separate tab.

To define a node as a Partial Hierarchy Root and/or change the definition of a partial hierarchy proceed as follows:

The editor window for the hierarchy view is open and the Plant Displays can be seen.

1. Select a diagram in the Tree View of the hierarchy to be defined as the root of the partial hierarchy.
2. Select the Edit menu, then Partial Hierarchy Root from the drop down menu.

Alternatively, select the function via the Context Menu (Right Mouse Click > Partial Hierarchy Root
).

3. The Partial Hierarchy Root Definition dialog box will open.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 114 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. Define and change the partial hierarchy in the Definition section.

o Plant Display : Name of the Plant Display selected in the hierarchy view.
o Partial Hierarchy Root: Select the check box to define the selected diagram as Partial Hierarchy
Root. Its subhierarchy will be displayed as a separate tab in the PDH in operation mode.
o Include Root in Partial Hierarchy: Select this check box if the selected plant display itself should
be contained in the partial hierarchy.

In this case, the selected plant display will appear at the first level of its subhierarchy when viewed in
a Partial Hierarchy tab in the operation mode.

o Partial Hierarchy Name: The name of the partial hierarchy that will appear on the partial hierarchy
tab in operation mode (default is the diagram name).
5. Enable the visibility of a defined partial hierarchy in the Visibility section.
Select the Partial Hierarchy Visible in Operation Mode check box to define the visibility of defined partial
hierarchy in operators PDH view.

An operator can also open the Partial Hierarchy Root Definition dialog box and define the visibility
of defined partial hierarchies in the PDH view.

6. Click on Save to save the changes, otherwise click on Cancel.

The icon beside the diagram thus defined as Partial Hierarchy Root changes as shown:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 115 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2.8.2 Find Partial Hierarchy Roots

The user may know the name of a partial hierarchy, but is unable to locate the item in the Plant Display Hierarchy. The
Find Partial Hierarchy Roots function is provided to get a list of all plant displays defined as partial hierarchy roots to
easily locate them.

To get a list all partial hierarchy roots and find them in the PDH proceed as follows:

The editor window for the Plant Display Hierarchy is open and the Plant Displays can be seen.

1. Select the Extras menu, then Find Partial Hierarchy Roots from the drop down menu.

Alternatively, select the function with the button

2. The Find Partial Hierarchy Roots dialog box appears listing all partial hierarchy roots.

3. Select a partial hierarchy root in the list.

4. Right click it to open a context menu containing following options:
o Partial Hierarchy Root: Selecting this option opens the Partial Hierarchy Root Definition dialog
box. The user can change the definition of a Partial Hierarchy Root in this dialog box.
o Select in Plant Display Hierarchy : Select it to locate the chosen partial hierarchy root in the Plant
Display Hierarchy list. The selected partial hierarchy root gets highlighted in the Plant Display Hierarchy list.
5. Click on Close to close the dialog box.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 116 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3 Diagram Editor
The Diagram Editor is the graphic tool which is used for editing Plant Displays and Function Diagrams. All functionality
required for engineering of the Function Diagrams and Plant Displays is available in the Diagram Editor.

Starting the view and its general layout are discussed. Many users may work simultaneously on a project, this multi
user operation has a certain arrangement. There are a number of diagram functions applicable to Function Diagrams
and Plant Displays, and edit functions for working with symbols in the diagrams.

The methods for working with Function Diagrams and working with Plant Displays are explained. Integrated
engineering is an SPPA-T3000 feature that removes the separation between Function Diagram and Plant Display
engineering and improves the effectiveness and efficiency of the engineering process.

3.1 Starting the View

The Diagram Editor is started automatically when the first diagram is opened in configuration mode from the Project
View.

3.1.1 Exiting the Diagram Editor

To exit the Diagram Editor:

• Select the File menu, then Exit from the drop down menu.

Alternatively the Diagram Editor can be closed via the standard window close button.

If any Plant Displays or Function Diagrams are open when exiting the Diagram Editor, any changes that have
been made are saved automatically (but not committed).

3.2 General Layout

The Diagram Editor view has the following components:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 117 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Menu Bar with the following drop down menus:

o File
o Edit
o View
o Tools
o Shapes
o Extras
o Window
o Help
• Toolbars arranged below the menu bar.
• The Library docked on the left of the Work Area.
• The Work Area for editing diagrams.

The Diagram Editor also has a context menu.

A useful feature of the Diagram Editor is that actions can be carried out in Single and Permanent Mode.

The Diagram Editor has a number of options that can be set by the user.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 118 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Diagrams open in the Diagram Editor can be refreshed by pressing the F5 key on the keyboard.

3.2.1 Toolbars
The Diagram Editor has the following toolbars available:

• Standard
• Links
• Alignment
• Graph Layout
• Interactors
• Font: To set the font used for text.

Opening the Toolbars

The user can choose which toolbars are to be opened in the Diagram Editor.

The Diagram Editor is open.

• Select the View menu, then Toolbars from the drop down menu. A further drop down menu will appear with
the toolbar options.
o To open a toolbar click on it in the menu. When a toolbar has been opened a tick appears next to it
in the menu.
o To close a toolbar click on it in the menu. The tick will also disappear.

3.2.1.1 Standard
The Standard toolbar contains the icons for:

• Copying and pasting of symbols.

•

• Format Painter Copies the common format from a selected object and applies it to the object, which is
clicked on next.
•

• Selection Format Painter Copies selected formats from an object:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 119 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1. Select the object from which the formats are to be copied.

2. Click on the icon.
3. The Select Properties dialog box will appear. The objects properties are listed in the dialog box.

4. Deselect the check boxes for the properties which are not to be copied.
5. Click on Copy.
6. Select the object to which the selected properties are to be copied.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 120 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Zoom control.
•

• Printing diagrams.
•

• Pan Interactor: For scrolling diagrams.

•

• Object Properties: Opens a dockable window containing the selected object properties.
•

• Committing and rolling back all Function Diagrams.

•

• Preview Activation, Activating and deactivating selected AF Blocks, or a whole Function Diagram.
•

• Committing or rolling back the last activation or deactivation.

•

3.2.1.2 Links
Free Graphic symbols may be linked together to form networks. To make these links use the icons on the links toolbar.

These links must not be used to make SPPA-T3000 Connections in Function Diagrams.

The Node creation mode is on the far left of the toolbar, the different types of links are available to the right of this.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 121 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.2.1.3 Alignment
The Alignment Toolbar has the controls for aligning, flipping or rotating symbols:

Align Left: Aligns the selected objects on their left hand side.

Align Horizontal Center: Shifts the objects horizontally so that they are aligned on their vertical median.

Align Right: Aligns the selected objects on their right hand side.

Align Top: Aligns the selected objects on their top.

Align Vertical Center: Shifts the objects vertically so that they are aligned on their horizontal median.

Align Bottom: Aligns the selected objects on their bottom.

Align Grid: Aligns the selected objects with the grid if the grid is set to Active.

Align Connections: Aligns the connection points of the selected objects with one another. These objects have
been connected by a graphic connection.

Distribute Horizontal: Shifts the objects horizontally, positioning them at equal distance from each other.

Distribute Vertical: Shifts the objects vertically, positioning them at equal distance from each other.

Flip Vertical: Flips an object vertically.

Flip Horizontal: Flips an object horizontally.

Rotate Right: Rotates an object to the right by ninety degrees.

Rotate Left: Rotates an object to the left by ninety degrees.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 122 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The last selected object is used as the reference to Align objects. If the objects have been selected
simultaneously (i.e. by dragging and dropping a lasso), then the position of the outermost object will be the
alignment reference.

3.2.1.4 Graph Layout

Free Graphic symbols may be connected together to form networks. The layout of these networks can be selected
from the Graph Layout toolbar.

3.2.1.5 Interactors
The Interactors Toolbar has icons for:

• SPPA-T3000 functions e.g. making connections.

• Free Graphic functions e.g. making graphic shapes for Plant Displays.

Connection (Graphical Interactor): Makes Local Connections.

Connection (Click Interactor): Makes Local and Global Connections.

Port Reference Interactor: Creates Macro Port References.

The Connection Point for objects in Plant Displays can be defined. These objects can be connected using
the Graphic Connection. To add a connection point click on the interactor then select an object. Hold down
the CTRL key and click on the object at the position of the connection point.
Graphic Connection: Creates connections between graphics. Connection is possible from one Connection
Point to another. Right-angles lines are created.

Foreground and Background: To select the colors of new objects.

Selection Mode: For selecting symbols in diagrams.

Rotate: To rotate symbols, press and hold on one of the selection handles, and rotate the symbol.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 123 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To create a label for normal text. Also used to edit an existing label.

To create a zoomable label for text (i.e. displayed text will resize when the diagram is zoomed). To create
multiline text by clicking into the text after selecting the label for normal text:

To create a zoomable label for text (refer to the description of zoomable label above), with additional text
color and background color features. (Note: This type of zoomable label increases the CPU load. Use
sparingly.)
To create a text on spline. After entering the text press Enter. To manipulate the spline, press and hold the
Left Mouse Button on any selected point and drag the point to the desired position.

To create a line. Click once at start point and once at end point.

To create a polyline. Click once at start point, once at every intermediate point, then double click at the
endpoint.

To create a polyline with an arrow. Click once at start point, once at every intermediate point, then double
click at the endpoint.

To create a polygon. Click once at start corner, once at every intermediate corner, then double click at the
last corner.

To create an outlined polygon. Click once at start corner, once at every intermediate corner, then double
click at the last corner.

To create a spline. Click once at start corner, once at every intermediate corner, then double click at the last
corner.

To create a closed spline. Click once at start corner, once at every intermediate corner, then double click at
the last corner.

To create a filled spline. Click once at start corner, once at every intermediate corner, then double click at the
last corner.

To create a rectangle. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button on the first corner, then drag the box to the
opposite corner and release the mouse button.

To create a filled rectangle. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button on the first corner, then drag the box to
the opposite corner and release the mouse button.

To create a relief rectangle. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button on the first corner, then drag the box to
the opposite corner and release the mouse button.

To create a zoomable relief label.

To create a shadow rectangle. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button on the first corner, then drag the box to
the opposite corner and release the mouse button.

To create a zoomable shadow label.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 124 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To create a filled round rectangle. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button on the first corner, then drag the
box to the opposite corner and release the mouse button.

To create a round rectangle.

To create an ellipse. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button on the first corner, then drag the box to the
opposite corner and release the mouse button.

To create a filled ellipse. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button on the first corner, then drag the box to the
opposite corner and release the mouse button.

To insert an imported image. Click on the icon, then click on the position on diagram for the image. A dialog
will appear. Select one of the images from the drop down list in the dialog.

To create a rectangular scale. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button on the first corner, then drag the box to
the opposite corner and release the mouse button.

To create a circular scale. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button on the first corner, then drag the box to the
opposite corner and release the mouse button.

To create a marker. Click on the position in the diagram for the marker.

To create an arc. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button on the first corner, then drag the box to the opposite
corner and release the mouse button.

To create a filled arc. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button on the first corner, then drag the box to the
opposite corner and release the mouse button.

Most of the Interactors Properties can be edited by a Property Sheet

3.2.2 Context Menu

The Diagram Editor has one context menu which is available for all diagrams. The menu always has the same menu
items, some of which may be grayed out in cases where they are not applicable. The context menu options are:

• Edit, which can be used to:

o Open Masks in Function Diagrams
o Open Pictogram Masks in Plant Displays
• Open Point View
• Open in Operation Mode or Open in Configuration Mode
• Set Cycle Time
• Edit Title Block
• Notes

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 125 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Rename
• Edit Links
• Navigate
• Copy
• Paste
• Delete
• Duplicate
• Group
• Ungroup
• View
o Fit to View
o Zoom 200%
o Zoom 50%
o Zoom Original Size
• Align or Distribute
• Flip or Rotate
• Arrange
• Macro
o Move to embedded macro
o Macro from selection
o Macro from diagram
o Compound Component from diagram
o Convert Compound Component to Macro
• Connections
o Convert to Connector
o Convert Connector to Link
o Reroute Connection
• Pictogram
o Exchange Prototype
• Help

3.2.3 Single and Permanent Mode

When working with the Diagram Editor (for example placing Pictograms or making connections) the user may wish to
perform a particular action either once, or maybe several times in succession. To enable this the function may be
selected in either:

• Single Mode, when the action will be performed once.

• Permanent Mode, when the action will be carried out several times.

Single and Permanent Mode is applicable to:

• Placing Symbols or Pictograms in diagrams.

• All icons on the Interactor toolbar.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 126 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Single Mode

For single mode select the symbol or icon with a single mouse click. The function can then be carried out once.

Permanent Mode

For permanent mode select the symbol or icon with a double mouse click, a red Frame then appears around the item
(indicating permanent mode). The function can then be carried out successively. For each successive repetition of the
function it is not necessary to reselect it.

To deselect permanent mode click again on the item and the red border will disappear, or select another function or
icon. Alternatively click on the Select icon on the toolbar:

3.2.4 Options
The Diagram Editor has a number of options available that may be set by the user. The settings are user specific and
are stored for each user individually.

To set the Diagram Editor options proceed as follows:

The Diagram Editor is open.

1. Select the Tools menu, then Options from the drop down menu.
2. The Options dialog box will appear.

3. Make any setting changes required.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 127 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. Click on Save to make the changes effective, otherwise click on Cancel.

The changes become effective immediately.

The options available are described below:

Edit
• Aspect Ratio of rectangular interactors: Sets the aspect ratio of interactors that draw rectangular shapes.
This is the ratio between the height and the width of the rectangle shape.
• Editors background same as windows desktop: The background color of the Work Area of the Diagram
Editor will be set to the background color used for the computers Windows operating system.
• Editors background color if opaque: The background color of the Work Area of the Diagram Editor can be
manually set here, if the above option has not been used (i.e. the same as Windows).
• Opaque Move/Ghost Move on all views: Controls the appearance of symbols when they are being moved.
The whole symbol can be seen when it is being moved, otherwise only a frame representing the symbol is
displayed.
• Keeping aspect ratio on all views: The ratio between the height and width of objects in a diagram is
maintained when zooming.
• Anti aliasing on all views: Utilizes high resolution to give rounded symbols a smoother appearance.
• Coordinate tracker on all views: The coordinates of the cursor are shown at the left hand bottom of the
Diagram Editor.

File and Start-up

Fit to view after load: The diagram is zoomed when opening diagrams, all symbols in the diagram (or the frame) will
be displayed.

Graph Layout

Use progress bar: A bar at the left hand bottom of the Diagram Editor, will indicate the progress when graph layouts
are drawn by the system.

Use multithreading: Ensures that the overall computer load is minimized when graph layouts are drawn by the
system.

Multi threading time slice (ms): Sets the granularity of multithreading.

3.2.5 Window
The Diagram Editor has window functions available to help arrange the diagrams open in the editor.

Select Next

Click on Select Next to page between open diagrams. Each diagram that is selected will appear on top of the others.

Select directly

Any opened diagram can be selected by its name. The selected diagram will appear on top of the others.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 128 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Arrange

Open diagrams can be automatically arranged as follows:

1. Select the Window menu, then Arrange from the drop down menu.
2. The Arrange Windows dialog box appears.

3. Select the required arrangement:

o Tile: arranges the windows in an even horizontal and vertical distribution.
o Tile Vertically: arranges the windows in an even vertical distribution.
o Tile Horizontally: arranges the windows in an even horizontal distribution.
o Cascade: Arranges the windows overlapping each other, each having an equal size.
4. Click on Arrange to perform the arrangement, otherwise click on Cancel.

The open windows will be automatically arranged.

3.2.6 Saving the View

The Save View option controls the default layout that appears when the user opens the Diagram Editor.

Proceed as follows:

The Diagram Editor is open.

Select the View Menu, then Save View.

The toolbar settings, and the relative sizes of the Library and Work Area, are saved. The Property Sheet and
Reference list will also reopen if they were included in the saved view.

The next time the user logs in, the same settings as saved in the previous session are available.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 129 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.3 Multi User Operation

Several users may work in the Diagram Editor simultaneously. Multi user access to diagrams is controlled by the
system to prevent conflicts caused by users trying to make changes concurrently.

It is possible to open and view any Function Diagram or Plant Display in the configuration mode in the Diagram Editor.
Should the user wish to make changes to diagrams this access is controlled, and is different for Function Diagrams
and Plant Displays.

Modifying Function Diagrams

Different users may make changes to the same Function Diagram at the same time, as long as they do not try to make
changes to the same symbol in the diagram.

• When a user makes a change, the item the user has changed becomes locked. When an item is locked only
the user who has made the change can make further changes to that item.
• Changes are locked at a module level. This means that if changes are made to an AF Block, or if an AF Block
has been placed, only that AF Block will be locked. All other unlocked AF Blocks in the same diagram can be
accessed and changed by other users.
• When a user commits changes, all locks on the changes are removed and any other user can again access
the items and change them.

When a Function Diagram is changed by different users, the diagram is not updated automatically for all users. In this
case the diagram has to be refreshed to view any changes by other users.

Diagrams open in the Diagram Editor can be refreshed by pressing the F5 key on the keyboard.

Modifying Plant Displays

Only one user at a time may make changes to any particular Plant Display.

• When a user makes a change the complete diagram becomes locked. No other user can then make changes
in the same diagram.
• When a user commits changes, the lock on the diagram is removed and other users can make changes in the
diagram.

3.4 Diagram Functions

These functions are applicable to all Function Diagrams and Plant Displays.

• Diagrams can be printed or closed.

• The Library can be opened in the Editor.
• The diagrams can be zoomed and the diagram grid can be set.
• The user can navigate to other diagrams.
• The buffer information window can be opened, this provides diagram information.
• There are functions for creating and editing diagram layers.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 130 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• There is a function for finding tags in diagrams.

3.4.1 Printing Diagrams

Printing of Function Diagrams and Plant Displays is performed in a similar way as with any other application on a
personal computer. Printing to a variety of hard copy devices with different hard copy formats is possible.

In the Diagram Editor any open diagram can be singly printed out. In the Project View, batch printing of diagrams can
be done.

The Page Setup provides the settings for the printer, Function Diagram page formats and special print options. The
procedure for printing hard copy is described, as well as a feature for producing image files.

3.4.1.1 Page Setup

The page setup menu contains all the settings required for:

• Printing Page: The printed page format.

• Drawing Page: The setup of Function Diagrams in the Diagram Editor to transform them to a suitable format
for printing.
• Special Print Options: The appearance of connectors in printed out Function Diagrams.

How to Edit the Page Setup

The Diagram Editor is open.

1. Select the File menu, then Page Setup from the drop down menu.
2. The Page Setup dialog box will appear, with a sheet each for Printing Page, Drawing Page and Special
Print Options.
3. Select the sheet and make any changes required.
4. Click on Save to make the changes, otherwise click on Cancel.

3.4.1.1.1 Printing Page

The Printing Page sheet contains the settings for the printed out page format.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 131 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• The Paper Size can be selected from the drop down list. This will be the size of the paper that the diagram is
printed out on.
• The Paper Orientation (either portrait or landscape) can be selected. This will be the printed out orientation.
• There is a Setup button that can be clicked on which will bring up a dialog box for further print setup settings.
The contents of this dialog box are specific to the printer and the printer driver software.

3.4.1.1.2 Drawing Page

Function Diagrams are viewed and edited in the Diagram Editor. The size of a Function Diagram is virtually unlimited
in the Diagram Editor, and the user can pan or zoom the diagram on the computer screen. Obviously the image in a
printed hard copy does not have this flexibility.

To transform a Function Diagram in the Diagram Editor into a printed hard copy the following method is used:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 132 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• The diagram is divided into a number of pages, and the pages are automatically numbered.
• Allowance is made for the title block and margins in the printout. Each page then has an available logic area
i.e. an area that can be used to print Function Diagram contents.
• In the Diagram Editor the available logic area for each page is represented by a frame. The user can see
which logic will appear on each page of the printed hard copy, and also ensure that no blocks are placed over
a page border.
• Where connections between pages occur, an internal connector is automatically created in the printed hard
copy. A special area is reserved for internal connectors in the printed pages.
• The size and number of pages (number of available logic areas) for a diagram can be set by the user. If the
amount of logic in a diagram increases or decreases the number of pages can then be set accordingly.

Making the Settings

The access right for Printer Administration is required for most Function Diagram Page Setup settings. This is
to keep the setup consistent throughout the project.

The following settings can be made on the Drawing Page sheet for the function diagram page setup:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 133 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Page Size: Either a predefined size from the drop down list, or a custom size can be entered.
• Page Orientation: A portrait or landscape orientation can be selected.
• Margins: The size of the page margins can be entered.
• Connector Margins: The size of the margin in which the automatically generated internal connectors will
appear, can be set.
• Title Block Height: The height of the title block in the printed hard copy.
• Page Numbers: The amount of pages required for the diagram can be set here. The pages occur in a grid,
the number of horizontal and vertical pages in the grid can be set.

The Page Numbers are also used for Plant Displays. For Plant Displays the frame is used, not virtual pages
as for Function Diagrams.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 134 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The amount of pages allowed is limited.

Horizontal: 50

Vertical: 1000

If an imported diagram exceeds these limits, the symbols and contents contained in the diagram are
automatically shifted to reduce the amount of pages.

3.4.1.1.3 Special Print Options

The special print options include the options available for printing Source Connectors and Destination Connectors.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 135 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The following options :

• Show Signal Item

• Show Designation and Setting
• Show Destinations (or Source)
• Destinations (or Source) display mode

are identical to those explained for Connector Information, except that they apply for printed out connectors.

There is also an option Activate where all the settings can be switched either on or off.

Any AF Block Information visible in the diagram will also be printed out in the diagram.

If the lines in the diagrams are not printing out well, then check the link width.

3.4.1.2 Printing Hard Copy

Printing out diagrams is initiated by a menu command. After initiating the command, the exact contents of the dialog
box that opens for printing will depend on the printer type and the driver software.

To print out a diagram proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor (if more than one diagram is open, select the diagram to be printed, by
clicking on it).

1. Select the File menu, then from the drop down menu either:
o Print: To print out all or selected pages of the diagram.
o Print in one page: To print out all the pages in the diagram on one sheet.
2. A dialog box will open giving the printer options, and the commands for printing.

The performance of the Workbench may deteriorate momentarily during printing.

Printing PDF

If an Adobe PDF printer has been added on the users Thin Client then diagrams can be printed to *.pdf files. Printing
to *.pdf files requires several Adobe PDF Printer settings.

When a *.pdf is printed the file name corresponds to the diagram name of the diagram that is being printed.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 136 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The performance of the Workbench may deteriorate momentarily during PDF printing.

3.4.1.2.1 Adobe PDF Printer Settings

If the user wants to print to PDF files the Adobe PDF Printer must be installed on the users Thin Client. After the
Adobe PDF printer has been installed then some additional settings are required.

To set the Adobe PDF printer parameters correctly proceed as follows

1. Create a folder on the Thin Client. The *.pdf files that are created will be saved here.
2. Set the Adobe PDF printer proprieties with the following settings:
Type of Setting Required Setting
Adobe PDF Conversion Deselect settings to
Settings View Adobe PDF Results
and
Prompt for Adobe PDF filename
Ports Add an Adobe PDF port and select the folder, created in Step 1, where the .pdf files will
be written to.

Ensure that this newly created port has been selected as the port that the Adobe PDF
printer will write to.

The next time the user selects to Print to the Adobe PDF printer, a .pdf file will be created in the selected folder on the
Thin Client.

3.4.1.3 Producing Image Files

A diagram can be printed (saved) to an image file. In this case the diagram as viewed in the Diagram Editor is saved.
Three different formats are available for this file:

File Extension Format Description

.jpg JPEG Compliant
.bmp Bitmap
.png Portable Network Graphics

To print to an image file proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor (if more than one diagram is open, select the diagram to be printed, by
clicking on it).

1. Select the File menu, then Print to Image from the drop down menu.
2. A dialog box will appear.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 137 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Click on Choose a File and:

1. Enter the filename in the directory in which the diagram is to be saved under
2. Choose the format for the image file.
4. The width and height (in pixels) can be adjusted by the user if required (select the Keep Aspect Ratio
check box if the ratio between the height and the width of the diagram are to be preserved when changing the
diagram size).
5. Click on Print to save the diagram, otherwise click on Cancel.

The performance of the Workbench may deteriorate momentarily during printing.

The diagram will be saved as an image file.

3.4.2 Tag Browser

In several engineering functions of SPPA-T3000 it is necessary to assign AF Blocks , signals or Point Groups . One
option is to manually enter a tag for the AF Block , signal or Point Group. Another option is to select the tag using the
tag browser.

Where is the Tag Browser Used?

The tag browser is used in the Diagram Editor to locate AF Blocks when assigning process connections on Plant
Displays, ports individually to faceplates, and ports individually to pictograms. Here is an example of the tag browser,
with the search results to locate AF Blocks:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 138 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The tag browser is used to locate signals to assign in Trend Displays, in XY Displays, in Point Groups, in Report
Definitions and as report trigger events. Here is an example of a tag browser with the search results, to locate signals:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 139 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The tag browser is used to locate Point Groups to assign in Report Definitions. Here is an example of a tag browser
with the search results, to locate Point Groups:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 140 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

How to Use the Tag Browser

A universal explanation on how to use the tag browser is given here. There are check boxes and fields that appear in
some tag browsers but not in others. Their appearance is dependent on the application for which the browser is being
used. All possible check boxes and fields are described here.

To assign an AF Block , a signal or Point Group proceed as follows:

The tag browser is open:

1. The opened dialog box displays the project structure as a tree view. Select the node in the tree or a single
function diagram where the AF Block , signal or Point Group is located. The selection will be displayed in the
Search Node field.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 141 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. Enter a search pattern for the tag in the Search Pattern field, or leave it as the pre-set asterisk.

There are several rules when specifying search patterns:

o The search pattern is case sensitive.
o An asterisk * wildcard replaces an unspecified number of characters. (e.g. Search pattern BB*10
will select all tags which begin with BB, and end with 10, of any total character length.)
o A question mark ? is a wildcard representing one character. (e.g. Search pattern BB?10 will select
tags which are 5 characters long, begin with BB and end with 10.)
3. Additional search criteria that may be available in the tag browser are:
o Archived signals only: Tick this box to select only those signals for which the Archive parameter
has been set in the signal definition mask.

o Container Ports : Tick this check box to enable the selection of a container port as a signal. Select
a container from the drop down list. Enter a search pattern in the Search Pattern field as additional search
criteria.

o AF Type: This field shows the type of AF Block that appear in the search results. The displayed AF
type corresponds to the Pictogram being parameterized and cannot be changed by the user.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 142 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

o Type: This criteria shows the type of tag being searched for. It corresponds to the application for
which the tag browser is being used. It cannot be changed by the user.

4. Click on Start Search or press the Enter key.

5. The search results will be appended to the browser window.
6. Click on the desired tag in the search results.

7. After selecting the tag the user has the following options:
o Click on Ok to simultaneously assign the tag and close the browser.
o Click on Apply to select the tag and keep the browser open.
o Click on Cancel to abort the selection and close the browser.

Alternatively, double clicking on the selected tag in the list will simultaneously assign the tag and
close the browser.

3.4.3 Closing a Diagram

A Plant Display or Function Diagram may be open in the Diagram Editor which the user wishes to close. When a
diagram is closed any changes that have been made are saved automatically (but not committed).

To close a diagram proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, the diagram is to be closed.

1. Select the window of the Plant Display or Function Diagram to be closed.

2. Select the File menu, then Close from the drop down menu.

The diagram will now close.

Alternatively, close the diagram with the standard window close button.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 143 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.4.4 Opening the Library

When the Diagram Editor is opened, the Library also opens, docked on the left hand side of the Diagram Editor Work
Area.

The Library is arranged in a tree with the different libraries as Nodes in the tree. Libraries exist in the tree for:

• Automation Functions
• Macros
• Hardware Proxies
• Prototypes

Each library can again be subdivided into Nodes. New Nodes can be created with the create Library Node, and Nodes
can be renamed or deleted as with Project Nodes.

Should the Library be closed via the standard window close button, the Library can then be reopened with this
function. To open the Library in the Diagram Editor proceed as follows:

The Diagram Editor is open.

• Select the File menu, then Open Library from the drop down menu.

The Library will open and dock on the left hand side of the Work Area.

3.4.5 Zoom
The zoom functions allow the user to control the magnification of a selected diagram in the Diagram Editor. When
zooming in the objects in the diagram will appear larger, when zooming out they will appear smaller.

The zoom control functions are available in the View menu of the Diagram Editor, or directly on the toolbar.

The options for zoom control are described below:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 144 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Fit to View

Select the View menu, then Fit to View from the drop down menu. Alternatively click on the icon on the toolbar:

The diagram is zoomed to a size where every symbol in the diagram is shown. The outermost symbols will be at the
edges of the diagram window. The diagram may appear distorted in this mode.

Zoom by 200%

Select the View menu, then Zoom by 200% from the drop down menu. Alternatively via the context menu (Right
Mouse Click > View > Zoom 200%), or click on the icon on the toolbar:

The diagram is zoomed to double its size.

Zoom by 50%

Select the View menu, then Zoom by 50% from the drop down menu. Alternatively via the context menu (Right Mouse
Click > View > Zoom 50%), or click on the icon on the toolbar:

The diagram is zoomed to half its size.

Zoom to Original Size

Select the View menu, then Zoom Original Size from the drop down menu. Alternatively click on the icon on the
toolbar, or via the context menu (Right Mouse Click > View > Zoom):

The diagram is zoomed to its original size as when it was opened.

Zoom in Rectangle

Click on the icon on the toolbar:

Using the cursor, drag a rectangle around the area to be zoomed in the diagram.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 145 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The diagram is zoomed in to the rectangle.

3.4.6 Pan and Zoom

The Pan and Zoom function provides a tool which is particularly useful when working with diagrams which are too big
to be easily viewed on the screen. When using this tool a separate window is opened which shows the layout of the
entire diagram, and a Frame in which the screen content is represented. The user can resize the Frame to zoom the
diagram, or move the Frame to pan in the diagram.

To use the Pan and Zoom function proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the View menu, then Pan and Zoom from the drop down menu.
2. A window appears for the Pan and Zoom function. This window can be resized and can also be docked

3. The Pan and Zoom window shows the complete drawing, all symbols in the drawing are shown in the
window. The Frame within the drawing with the four handles (one on each corner) shows the contents of the
diagram in the window in the Work Area. If the diagram window is resized, the Frame is also automatically
resized.
4. To Pan the diagram: the Frame must be moved within the Pan and Zoom window.
o Click in the Pan and Zoom window anywhere outside the Frame. The Frame will be moved, the
cursor position will be the midpoint of the Frame in its new position. OR
o Press and hold the mouse button with the cursor anywhere within the Frame. The Frame will then be
dragged with the cursor as it is being moved within the Pan and Zoom window. Release the mouse button
when the Frame is at the desired position.
5. To Zoom the diagram: the Frame must be resized within the Pan and Zoom window. Press and hold the
mouse button with the cursor on any of the handles of the Frame. By dragging the handle the Frame can be
resized. Release the mouse button when the Frame is at the desired size.

The Pan and Zoom window can be closed via the windows close button, or will close automatically if no diagram is
open.

3.4.7 Magnifying Glass

The magnifying glass utility can be used to enlarge selected items on a Function Diagram or a Plant Display. To
activate the magnifying glass proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor

1. Press and hold the middle mouse button. This activates a square magnifying area.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 146 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Alternate ways to activate the magnifying glass are:

pressing on the ALT key, then pressing and holding the left mouse button or,

pressing the CTRL key then pressing and holding the middle mouse button to activate a round
magnifying glass or,

pressing on the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing and holding the left mouse button to activate a
round magnifying glass.

2. Drag the mouse cursor over the objects that require magnification.

The CTRL and ALT keys can be released.

3. Release the mouse button to deactivate the magnifying glass.

The magnifying glass utility is also available in Operation Mode and the Prototype Editor.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 147 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.4.8 Diagram Grid

The diagram grid provides an aid to drawing in diagrams, and helps to position and align symbols and connectors etc.
in the diagram.

The grid is represented with small dots in the diagram. From these dots the vertical and horizontal spacing of the grid
can be seen. When placing or moving symbols in the diagram the symbol will align itself with the grid; no intermediate
position between the grid lines is possible.

In Function Diagrams the size and shape of symbols is dependent on the grid. If the horizontal or vertical grid spacing
is changed, then the symbols (which are aligned with the grid) will change accordingly. The size and shape of symbols
in Plant Displays are not affected by the grid.

Setting the Grid Properties

The Grid properties can be viewed by the user. The settings apply to the diagram that is selected in the Diagram
Editor.

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the Tools menu, then Grid from the drop down menu.
2. The grid properties dialog box will now open.

3. Edit the grid properties where required, and click on Ok to effect the changes, otherwise click on Cancel to
ignore any changes.

The options are described below:

• Visible: When the Visible box is selected, the small dots in the diagram which indicate the grid can be seen.
When Visible is not selected the dots are invisible, but the grid is still active.

The grid is only visible when the Spacing is not less than 6 or the diagram is zoomed in by 200%.

The default grid of 4x4 for Plant Displays will not be visible in the 1:1-zoom.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 148 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Visible grid consumes a lot of client CPU load. The Workbench will then operate slower.

In Operation Mode the grid is not displayed, and cannot be made visible.

• Active: When the Active box is selected, the grid functionality is active. With Active not selected the grid is
not active, symbols can be positioned anywhere in the diagram with no grid alignment.
• Spacing: Edit the Horizontal Spacing and Vertical Spacing to adjust the grid resolution. With smaller
spacing symbols can be positioned at finer intervals. The spacing can only be set for Plant Displays using this
dialog box. For Function Diagrams it is set as a project setting.
• Origin: The Origin X and Origin Y starting point of the grid. The figures are the distance the grid starts from
the left hand top corner of the diagram. The origin settings cannot be edited.

3.4.9 Navigate
Functions are provided to navigate in diagrams. These include:

• Navigating between signal sources and destinations.

• Navigating to embedded diagrams.
• Navigating to a Plant Display or Function Diagram to which a process connection exists.
• Navigating to the plant manual or to linked documents.

3.4.9.1 Source or Destination

A function is provided to navigate along signals in Function Diagrams. The source or destination of any signal can be
found for all signals:

• Internal to diagrams.
• External to, or between diagrams.
• From Macros.

How to Navigate to Signal Sources or Destinations

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, or open as a Dynamic Function Diagram.

1. Select the signal to navigate along. Signal links or connectors at either sources or destinations can be
selected.
2. Click the right mouse button to open the context menu, select Navigate from the context menu, then
Source/Destination from the drop down menu.
3. One of the following will occur:
o If the signal has no corresponding source or destination a message will appear.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 149 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

o If a signal source has been selected that has only one destination, then this destination will be
navigated to immediately. The destination will be selected automatically, if this destination is on another
diagram, the diagram will be opened automatically.
o If neither of the above occur the Select a navigation target dialog box will open. Using the functions
in the dialog box navigation can be made to either a signal source, or to one of the multiple signal
destinations.
o

o
4. The Select a navigation target dialog box consists of the following:
o The signal Source.
o External applications: all signal destinations external to the source diagram.
o Internal applications: all signal destinations internal to the source diagram.
5. To navigate to the source or any of the destinations proceed as follows:
o To navigate to the signal source: Select the source signal by clicking on it.
o To navigate to any of the signal destinations: Select any internal or external destination by clicking
on it.

For Specialized S7 Applications, the directly connected Automation Function Blocks ware listed as
well as the logical communication partner of a connection via Global Resources. The type of the
connection is also listed in the dialog.

6. To navigate to the source or destination click on OK. The source or destination will be selected automatically,
if this is on another diagram, the diagram will be opened automatically. Otherwise click on Cancel.

3.4.9.2 Embedded Diagram

An Embedded Diagram such as a Macro or Compound Component may be contained in a Function Diagram. This
Embedded diagram can either be opened via the Project View, or else the user can navigate directly to it.

To navigate to an embedded diagram proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor or open as a Dynamic Function Diagram, with the embedded diagram
contained in it.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 150 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1. Select the symbol for the embedded diagram in the Function Diagram.
2. Click the right mouse button to open the context menu, select Navigate from the context menu, then
Embedded Diagram from the drop down menu.

The embedded diagram will open.

An instance of a Compound Component that is opened as an Embedded Diagram cannot be modified.

3.4.9.3 Navigate Up in Embedded Diagrams

When an Embedded Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, it is possible to navigate up to the Function Diagram, that
contains the Embedded Diagram.

To navigate up proceed as follows:

Make a click with the right mouse button to open the context menu, select Navigate from the list, then Up from the
drop down menu.

The diagram containing the embedded diagram will open.

3.4.9.4 Plant Display

Direct navigation from Function Diagrams to Plant Displays can be performed for Function Diagrams which:

• Have diagram assignments to Plant Displays.

• Contain process connections to Pictograms or Faceplates in Plant Displays.

To navigate to a Plant Display proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the AF Block or proxy in the Function Diagram.

If no selection is made, the navigation will be performed to the Plant Display that has a diagram
assignment.

2. Click the right mouse button to open the context menu, select Navigate from the context menu, then Plant
Display from the drop down menu.
o If there is no process connection, a message appears.
o If there is a process connection to a single Plant Display, the Plant Display will open. The element to
which the process connection is made will be automatically selected.
o If the AF Block or proxy has more than one process connection, the user will be prompted to choose
the required connection from a drop down list. The selected Plant Display will open. The element to which the
process connection is made will be automatically selected.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 151 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Navigation to Plant Displays can also be performed from Dynamic Function Diagrams.

3.4.9.5 Function Diagram

Pictograms and Faceplates in Plant Displays may have process connections to AF Blocks or proxies in Function
Diagrams. Using this function it is possible to navigate directly from a Plant Display to a Function Diagram that
contains the element with the process connection.

To navigate to a Function Diagram with a process connection proceed as follows:

A Plant Display is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the Pictogram or Faceplate in the Plant Display.

2. Click the right mouse button to open the context menu, select Navigate from the context menu, then
Function Diagram from the drop down menu.
o If there is no process connection, a message appears.
o If there is a process connection to a single Function Diagram, the Function Diagram will open. The
element to which the process connection is made will be automatically selected.
o If the AF Block or proxy has more than one process connection, the user will be prompted to choose
the required connection from a drop down list. The selected Function Diagram will open. The element to
which the process connection is made will be automatically selected.

Navigation to Dynamic Function Diagrams can also be performed from Pictograms in Plant Displays that are
open in the Operation Mode.

3.4.9.6 Plant Manual

Users can navigate from any Automation Function to the corresponding part of the Plant Manual.

To Navigate from an AF Block in a Function Diagram to the Plant Manual, proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select an AF Block or proxy in the Function Diagram.

2. Click the right mouse button to open the context menu, select Navigate from the context menu, then Plant
Manual from the drop down menu.

The Plant Manual for the tag will open. If no corresponding Plant Manual document exists for the tag, then the user is
informed with a message.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 152 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Navigation to the Plant Manual can also be performed from Dynamic Function Diagrams.

3.4.9.7 Linked Documents

Users can navigate from any Automation Function, Pictogram or Faceplate to linked documents.

To navigate to a linked document, proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram or Plant Display is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select an AF Block or proxy in a Function Diagram, or a Pictogram or a Faceplate in a Plant Display.

2. Click the right mouse button to open the context menu, select Navigate from the context menu, then Linked
Documents from the drop down menu.

The linked document for the tag will open.

If more than 1 document has been linked, then the user can choose which document to open. If no document has
been linked to the tag, then the user is informed with a message.

Navigation to linked documents can also be performed from Dynamic Function Diagrams.

3.4.9.8 Notes
Users can navigate from any Automation Function to the notepad of the Automation Function

To Navigate from an AF Block in a Function Diagram to the notepad, proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select an AF Block or proxy in the Function Diagram.

2. Click the right mouse button to open the context menu, then select Notes.

The Notes dialog box for the tag will open.

Navigation to the notepad of an AF can also be performed from Dynamic Function Diagrams.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 153 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.4.10 Buffer Information Window

The buffer information window provides information on a diagram selected in the Diagram Editor.To open the buffer
information window proceed as follows:

The Diagram Editor is open.

1. Select the View menu, then Buffer Information Window from the drop down menu.
2. The Buffer Information Window will appear. The window can be docked against the side of the editor.

The number of objects, nodes and links contained in the diagram is shown, as well as the manager bounding box. The
manager bounding box is the smallest possible rectangle surrounding the objects in a diagram. The first two numbers
are the values of the x and y axes of the upper left corner of the box, and the last two numbers are its width and height.

3.4.11 Select in Project Node

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, or open as a Dynamic Function Diagram.

To find the Diagram in the Project Hierarchy proceed as follows:

1. Select the View menu, then Select in Project View .

2. The Project View will open. The Project Node in the Tree View will be selected and the contents of the node
will be shown.

3.4.12 Diagram Layers

A diagram can consist of different layers. The Layers Editor is used to add or remove layers.

When using the Shapes > Arrange menu functions (e.g. Bring Forward), new layers are created automatically
if required.

To open the Layers Editor proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the View menu, then Layers Editor from the drop down menu.
2. The Layers Editor dialog box will appear.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 154 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. All the layers existing in the diagram are listed. The layers can be edited as follows:
o Add: Clicking on the Add button adds a layer to the diagram.
o Remove: Clicking on the Remove button removes a selected layer from the diagram.

The contents of removed layers will also be removed.

o Remove Empty: Clicking on the Remove Empty button will remove unused layers from the diagram.
4. When completed close the dialog box by clicking on the window close button.

3.4.13 Find Tag

Automation Functions, proxies and Macros are identified by their symbol tags (i.e. tag name and tag item). The Find
Tag function is provided to search any Function Diagram for symbol tags that conform to a particular search pattern.

The find tag function is also available for Dynamic Function Diagrams open in the Workbench.

Menu: Extras > Find Tag inside Diagram.

To find tags in a Function Diagram, proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the Edit menu, then Find Tag from the drop down menu.
2. The Find Tags in Diagram dialog box will open.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 155 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

o Enter a search pattern in the Tag Name field.

A wildcard search is made by entering an asterisk (*). The asterisk represents any group of
characters. Even if the exact tag name is known the asterisk (*) must be included in the entry.

o Select Match Case if the search is to be case sensitive.

o Select the search Direction, either Up or Down. The symbols will be searched in order of their
Instance IDs.
3. Click on Find Next, all symbols in the diagram are searched in order of the search direction. If any symbol
with a tag that matches the search criteria is found it will be automatically selected in the diagram, otherwise a
message is given. The user can continue to search in either direction until no match is found.
4. When complete click on Cancel to close the dialog box.

The find tag function can also be used to find Macros in the Diagram.

3.4.14 Find Open Plant Display Mappings

Pictograms and Faceplates in Plant Displays are mapped to AF Blocks in Function Diagrams with Process
Connections. The process connection can be made using :

• Default Mapping: The assignment of all Ports is predefined.

• Special Mapping: Ports can be manually assigned individually.

A project typically requires many process connections which have to be established and maintained. Using the Find
Open Plant Display Mappings function in the Diagram Editor can locate open connections on a single Plant Display.

Open plant display mappings are mappings which are either non-existent or non-functional, and can have the following
states:

Invalid The mapped AF Block does not exist, or no mapping has been assigned.
Offline The mapped AF Block exists but is not active.
Online The mapped AF Block is active but has been deleted. When the deletion is activated the mapping will
Delete become invalid.
Reserved The Pictogram has been placed in Integrated Engineering mode, but the AF Block has not yet been
placed (i.e. still exists in the reference list).

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 156 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Connectable A Pictogram has been mapped to an existing AF, but the connection is not closed. This might occur if
the mapped AF was deleted then added again.

To find open Plant Display mappings on a single Plant Display, proceed as follows:

A Plant Display is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the View menu, then List Open Mappings from the drop down menu.
2. The Open Mappings window will open above the Plant Display.

Each row in the list in the dialog box contains details about a single open default or special mapping.
3. Click on an item in the list to highlight it's corresponding pictogram on the Plant Display.
4. Click on pictogram on the Plant Display to highlight it's corresponding item in the list.
5. Click on Map to close the process connections of all items with Connectable AF Status.
6. When complete use the standard close button on the Open Mappings window to close it.

3.4.15 Select in Project View

This function provides a method for direct navigation into the Project View. The function is available for Function
Diagrams and Plant Displays in the Diagram Editor. The location in the Project hierarchy will automatically be found for
the selected diagram.

To navigate directly to the location of a Function Diagram or Plant Display in the Project View, proceed as follows:

The Diagram Editor is open.

1. Click on the diagram in the Diagram Editor.

2. Select the View menu, then Select in Project View from the drop down menu.

The Project View will appear with the diagram selected in the List View .

The Project View will automatically open, if it is not open already.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 157 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.5 Edit Functions

The edit functions are used for manipulating symbols in Function Diagrams and Plant Displays. Symbols can be
selected and then either :

• copied
• pasted
• duplicated, or
• deleted

Properties of symbols placed in diagrams can be viewed and edited in the property sheet. Symbols can be hidden and
unhidden.

Symbols in diagrams can be arranged in graphic networks and layouts. There are a number of graphic shape functions
for manipulating symbols in diagrams.

3.5.1 Selecting Symbols

Symbols must often be selected in a diagram before some operation is carried out e.g. cutting or pasting, or opening a
mask. This applies to all symbols e.g. AF Blocks, connections, Pictograms, in both Function Diagrams and Plant
Displays.

Symbols can be selected with two methods:

• By using the mouse in the diagram.

• With a selection function from the menu.

How to Select Symbols Using the Mouse

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

The symbols can be selected individually (single selection), or a number of symbols can be selected at once (multi
selection).

• Single Selection: Place the cursor over the symbol and click the left mouse button.
• Multi Selection: Press the left mouse button and drag the lasso over the symbols to be selected.

Selected symbols are marked with handles. In the example below these are the eight small square blocks around the
AND block.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 158 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Alternatively, a multi selection can be made by pressing the CTRL or SHIFT key and selecting additional
symbols with mouse clicks (as for single selections). If a selected symbol is clicked on in this mode, it
becomes deselected.

How to Select Symbols Using a Menu Function

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

• Select the Edit menu, then one of the following options from the drop down menu:
o Select All: Every symbol in the diagram is selected.
o Select All Nodes : Every block (e.g. AF Block, Pictogram) in the diagram is selected.
o Select All Links: In Function Diagrams, all signal links will be selected.

3.5.2 Moving Symbols

Symbols must often be moved in a diagram. This applies to all symbols e.g. AF Blocks, connections, Pictograms and
free graphics in both Function Diagrams and Plant Displays.

Symbols can be moved by two methods:

• By using the mouse in the diagram.

• By using the arrow keys.

How to Move Symbols Using the Mouse

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Position the cursor over the symbol.

2. Press and hold the Left Mouse Button.
3. Holding the Left Mouse Button, drag the symbol to the desired position.
4. Release the mouse button.

The appearance of a symbol that is being moved (Opaque Move or Ghost Move) can be selected via the
Options.

How to Move Symbols Using the Arrow Keys

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the symbol to be moved.

2. Press any of the arrow keys (up, down, left or right) to move the symbol.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 159 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Simultaneously press and hold the SHIFT key to move the symbol in smaller steps.

When the Grid is activated, the symbol will move in steps according to the Grid spacing.

3.5.3 Resizing Symbols

When symbols have been placed in diagrams it may be necessary to resize them. This can be carried out quickly and
easily by using the mouse.

AF Blocks and Connectors in Function Diagrams cannot be resized.

To resize a symbol, proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the symbol. The bounding box of the symbol is represented by handles which are used for resizing the
symbol.

2. Position the cursor over a handle.

3. Press and hold the mouse button, and move the cursor to resize the symbol.
o Use a handle on a vertical side of the bounding box to resize the width.
o Use a handle on a horizontal side of the bounding box to resize the height.
o Use a handle on a corner of the bounding box to resize the height and width simultaneously.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 160 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

When resizing using a corner handle, simultaneously press the SHIFT key to keep the aspect ratio of
the symbol constant.

4. Release the mouse button.

The symbol will be resized.

3.5.4 Copy Selection

The user may wish to reuse symbols which already exist in Function Diagrams or Plant Displays. The symbols can be
copied into the Paste Buffer from where they can be pasted into diagrams again.

To copy symbols in a diagram proceed as follows:

The diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the symbols to be copied in the diagram.

2. Select the Edit menu, then Copy from the drop down menu.

The selected symbols are copied into the Paste Buffer.

Alternatively, select the function via the Context Menu (Right Mouse Click > Copy).

3.5.5 Paste Selection

Symbols which are in the Paste Buffer can be pasted into diagrams.

To paste into a diagram proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor. A selection must be copied into the Paste Buffer before it can be pasted.

1. Click on the area where the object is to be pasted.

2. Select the Edit menu, then Paste from the drop down menu.

The symbols from the Paste Buffer are copied into the diagram in the area of the last mouse click.

AF Blocks and Pictograms are copied and pasted with the same parameters.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 161 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Alternatively, select the function via the Context Menu (Right Mouse Click > Paste).

3.5.6 Duplicate Selection

The duplicate function makes a one-step copy of symbols onto the same diagram.

To duplicate a selection proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, the symbols to be duplicated are in the diagram.

1. Select the symbols to be duplicated.

2. Select the Edit menu, then Duplicate from the drop down menu.

The selected symbols are copied immediately into the same diagram.

When duplicating, the symbols are NOT copied into the Paste Buffer

AF Blocks and Pictograms are duplicated with the same parameters.

Alternatively, select the function via the Context Menu (Right Mouse Click > Duplicate).

3.5.7 Delete Selection

Symbols can be removed from a diagram with the Delete command. Deleted symbols are not copied into the Paste
Buffer.

To delete symbols proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the symbols to be deleted.

2. Select the Edit menu, then Delete from the drop down menu.
3. A dialog box appears to confirm the delete function.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 162 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. To delete the symbols click Yes, otherwise to cancel the function click on No.

If confirmed the selected symbols are deleted from the diagram.

When activated symbols are deleted they turn to a light gray color, and then disappear when the Function
Diagram has been committed and activated (see Status Indication). Symbols which are not activated
disappear immediately when they are deleted.

Alternatively, select the function with the Del key, or via the context menu (Right Mouse Click > Delete).

Further steps are required for deleting Intelligent Field Devices or S7 Hardware Proxies.

3.5.8 The Property Sheet

Symbols or objects placed in diagrams have properties associated with them. These properties could include for
example: colors, text, fonts or dimensions. Symbol properties can be viewed and edited in the property sheet.

To view and edit the properties of an object, proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the object in the diagram.

2. Select the View menu, then Property Sheet from the drop down menu.
3. The property sheet will appear, containing the properties for the object. This box can be docked on the side of
the editor.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 163 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. The properties can be edited. Some properties cannot be changed directly, but have a button which is clicked
to lead to a further editing box.

The object properties will be updated accordingly.

The properties of several objects can be changed simultaneously. Select multiple objects, then make the
required change in the property sheet. All the selected objects will then be changed.

Properties can be reset to the initial values, as when the symbol or object was placed in the diagram:

In the left column of the property sheet click on the name of the property with the Right Mouse Button. A
RESET button appears. Then click on the RESET button with the Left Mouse Button.

3.5.9 Hiding and Unhiding Symbols

If required, symbols can be hidden or unhidden in diagrams. Symbols will only remain hidden while the diagram is
open in the Diagram Editor. To make all symbols on a layer permanently invisible the layer property Visible can be
deselected.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 164 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

How to Hide a Symbol

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the symbol or symbols to be hidden.

2. Open the property sheet for the symbol/s.
3. In the property sheet, set the visible property to False.

The symbol will be hidden. When the symbol is hidden it cannot be seen or selected.

How to Unhide Symbols

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

• Select the Edit menu, then Show Hidden Objects from the drop down menu.

All hidden symbols in the diagram will now become visible (their visible properties will be set to True).

3.5.10 Graph Layouts and Networks

In diagrams it is possible to arrange symbols in graphic networks and then apply graph layouts to these networks. In
this chapter it is first described how to create graphic networks, and then how to apply the graph layouts.

Graphic Networks

Graphic Networks consist of nodes which are linked together.

To convert elements into nodes proceed as follows:

1. Select the symbols to be converted.

2. Select the Shapes menu, then Convert to Node from the drop down menu.

The selected objects will be converted to nodes.

Nodes can be converted back to graphics using the Convert to Graphic function in the Shapes menu.

The nodes must then be linked together as follows:

1. Open the Links toolbar.

2. Connect the nodes using connectors from the Links toolbar.

Graph Layouts

A graph layout can be assigned to a graphic network as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor. A graphic network has been created in the diagram.

1. Open the Graph Layout toolbar.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 165 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. Select the graphic layout from the toolbar.

The selected graphic layout can be edited via the Layout Parameters.

3. Select the network to which the layout is to be applied.

4. Click on Perform Layout.

The selected layout will be applied.

A detailed description of the Hyperlink Layout Graph Layout can be found in the description for Connection
Routing.

3.5.11 Graphic Shape Functions

The functions in the graphic shape menu provide many options for editing symbols in diagrams.

To access the graphic shape functions, select the Shapes menu, then the required function from the drop down
menus.

The following graphic shape functions are available:

Align or Distribute

To automatically align or distribute selected symbols. See the alignment toolbar for a description of each function.

Flip or Rotate

To flip or rotate selected symbols. See the alignment toolbar for a description of each function.

Arrange

To arrange the order of overlapping symbols by manipulating the layer of the symbol/s. Move selected symbols
completely to the top or bottom layer select Bring to Front or Send to Back. To move selected objects a single layer
up or down, select Bring Forward or Send Backward.

When using the Arrange functions, new layers will be automatically created where required.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 166 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Editing Shapes

To manipulate free graphic symbols, a union, intersection or subtraction of selected symbols can be made, or symbols
can be flattened. Zoomable labels can be converted to graphical shapes.

Group and Ungroup

To group a selection of symbols together, or to ungroup them to their constituent symbols. Symbols can be grouped in
2 ways:

• Group Set: Is the simpler of the 2 options. The symbols are grouped and can also be used in Function
Diagrams.
• Group: With this option the group contains more properties. This allows more manipulation after the symbols
are grouped. The grouped symbol cannot be used in Function Diagrams.

These functions are also available via the Context Menu (Right Mouse Click: Group or UnGroup).

Convert / Revert to Graphic Handle

To convert graphic objects to fixed size or transformed handles, or to unwrap the graphic handles.

Graphical Attributes

To set attributes of selected symbols to:

• Reshapeable / Unreshapeable.
• Moveable / Unmoveable.

3.6 Working with Function Diagrams

The control system functionality is configured in Function Diagrams. This includes all control functions, control logic
and input and output signals. This is achieved by configuring Automation Functions, Hardware Proxies and
Management Proxies , which are represented graphically as symbols in Function Diagrams.

Working with Function Diagrams involves:

• Placing, opening and connecting symbols.

• Setting AF Block and Proxy Parameters, and viewing the Plant Display mapping.
• Setting the symbol appearance. Additional information can be provided to the user with color and text in the
diagrams.
• Creating, modifying and utilizing Macros. These are user developed functions.
• Single element activation. Individual symbols can be activated and deactivated in Function Diagrams.
• Determining how the quality code for logic with feedback loops should be handled.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 167 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.1 Placing Symbols

Symbols are placed in the Function Diagrams to build up logic or to realize control functionality. The full range of
Automation Functions and Proxies for the project, which can be placed into the Function Diagrams are available in the
SPPA-T3000 Library. To use a symbol in a Function Diagram it must be selected from the SPPA-T3000 Library, then
placed in the Function Diagram.

Symbols in a Function Diagram must be appropriate to the type of Runtime Container to which the Function
Diagram is assigned. For example, a Management Proxy can only be placed in a Function Diagram that is
assigned to a Management Container.

To select a symbol from the SPPA-T3000 Library and place it in a Function Diagram proceed as follows:

The Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, the SPPA-T3000 Library is open .

1. Select the diagram window of the target diagram for the new symbol.
2. Find the required symbol in the Library . Select the symbol from the SPPA-T3000 Library, with a single mouse
click.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 168 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Move the cursor to the target Function Diagram. The symbol moves with the cursor over the Function
Diagram.
4. Move the cursor to the desired position in the Function Diagram, and click again.

The symbol is placed in the Function Diagram.

The symbols can also be selected in permanent mode. A symbol will then be placed in the diagram with every
successive mouse click.

3.6.2 Opening Masks

Symbols in Function Diagrams have a number of parameters or fields which need to be accessed for viewing or
changing. These parameters are contained in masks and could be, for example, controller settings, signal definitions
or tag names. To open a symbol mask to access the parameters, and to make any changes if required, proceed as
follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the symbol.

2. Click the right mouse button to open the context menu then select Edit from the context menu.
3. The mask containing the parameters now opens in the Diagram Editor.
4. Make any changes required in the mask.
5. Click on either Save or Cancel.
o Save confirms any changes. If any mask inputs are invalid an error message will appear and the
invalid parameters will be highlighted in the table. The changes cannot be saved until all parameters are valid.
o Cancel ignores any changes.

Whenever a mask is saved, the layout of the mask (e.g. size and column width) is also saved, and
becomes the default setting for the mask layout when it is reopened.

Alternatively, double click on the symbol to open it.

3.6.3 Setting AF Block and Proxy Parameters

AF Blocks and Proxies have a number of parameters and properties associated with them which are contained in their
masks.

When AF Blocks and Proxies are created, the symbol properties and parameters are also automatically set.
Depending on the application of the logic, the user may wish to edit these. This chapter provides information on how
these parameters are created, and how to set them manually.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 169 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Properties Sheet

The Symbol Properties are set in the Properties sheet of the mask.

• Symbol Type: The type of Automation Function. This field is grayed out (the user cannot change it) and is set
automatically.
• Type Id: An internal ID number for the symbol type. This field is grayed out (the user cannot change it) and is
set automatically.
• Tag Name: The Tag Name is inherited directly from the diagram name when the symbol is placed, but can be
edited by the user. Any changes to the diagram name will also be inherited, except in cases where the Tag
Name has already been manually changed by a user.

The inheritance of the new name may result in the renaming of signals. In this case, a message appears, and
the user can confirm whether or not the signals should also be renamed.

• Tag Item: A number assigned by the system, but can be edited by the user.
• Instance Id: An internal ID number for the instantiated AF. This field is grayed out (the user cannot change it)
and is set automatically.
• Designation: The designation is inherited from the diagram designation when the symbol is placed, but can
be edited by the user. Any changes to the diagram designation will also be inherited, except in cases where
the designation has already been manually changed by a user.
• Comment: Free for editing.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 170 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The combination of Tag Name and Tag Item (called the symbol tag) must be unique. If the user attempts to
enter a duplicate, the system will automatically reassign it uniquely.

Illegal characters are not permitted in the names.

The Tag Name and Tag Item can also be edited with the Rename function.

The Parameters Sheet

The parameters sheet displays all the input and output ports which are accessible to the user. The parameters may be
distributed over more than one sheet (e.g. Parameter Set 1 .. Parameter Set 3).

Some parameters in the parameter sheet may be involved in inheritance between symbols.

Since changing parameters may result in the breaking of inheritance or changing parameters in connected
symbols, knowledge of inheritance effects must be understood before making any changes.

An example is shown in the following picture:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 171 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The first column Type indicates whether the Port is an input Port I or an output Port O.

The next column shows the Name of this Port as displayed in the symbol of the AF Block.

The column Value >> shows the presetting of a Port. Editable cells can be made more visible by selecting a
background color for these cells in Diagram Styles.

If the data type of a Port is Boolean, the cell will contain a check box. A selected box means TRUE, not selected means
FALSE.

There are ports where theValue is edited using a Port specific dialog. The details of these Port specific dialogs can be
found in the Library description of the AF.

The settings in the Visible Port and Visible Parameter columns determine the visibility of Ports and parameter values
in Function Diagrams.

If a Port is of the data type int or float and is editable, a number can be typed into column Value.

There are Ports that have connections for which the Values can be edited. In this case the connection will override the
entered value if the connection is activated. If the connection is deactivated the entered Value will be read.

The Value >> column can be expanded with a mouse-click, the Parameter Key column then becomes visible. The
Parameter Key is available for all Ports, and can be freely edited by the user. The Parameter Key can be used to
group parameters, and is particularly useful as selection criteria for spreadsheet engineering.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 172 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Archive Parameters

The Archive >> column can be expanded with a mouse-click. Additional columns Variation min, Variation max,
Variation Percent and EU will appear as shown in the following picture:

If the Archive >> column is checked the Ports data will be archived.

Input Ports cannot be archived.

The Variation Percent is a delta-band, representing a minimum change of the analog data that is needed to trigger a
transfer to the archive. This value is expressed as a percentage of the range between Variation Min and Variation
Max. A typical value is 1%.

Inheritance

For some AFs, identified with this icon,

the Variation min, Variation max, Variation Percent and EU are inherited from the input ports LL, UL, DB, and EU,
respectively.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 173 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Alarm Parameters

The Alarm >> column can be expanded with a mouse-click. Additional columns Alarm Type , Priority, Active Alarm
Text, Deactive Alarm Text, Acknowledge Mode and Suppress Audible Alarm will appear as shown in the following
picture:

The bright cells of the Alarm column can be checked to declare the signal as an alarm.
After the Alarm column has been selected, the expanded columns also become bright for editing.

Whenever the Alarm cell is selected, the Archive cell will be automatically selected by the system. This
ensures that all alarms are archived.

In the column Alarm Type , an Alarm Type for the alarm can be selected.

A Priority can be defined to each alarm, superordinate to the Alarm Type . It can be used to establish a user-
designed alarm hierarchy based on the functional areas of a plant.

The Active Alarm Text and Deactive Alarm Text are displayed in the ASD, depending on the alarm status. The
alarm text can be inherited using standard and user defined inheritance rules as defined in the Project Settings.

If no text is entered for the deactive alarm, then in the ASD the deactive alarm text will be the same as the active alarm
text, but will be enclosed in square brackets. For example, in the ASD:

• When the alarm status is active: HIGH is displayed.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 174 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• When the alarm status is deactive: [HIGH] is displayed.

The Acknowledge Mode is used to select the automatic acknowledgement mode for the alarm. The following options
can be set:

• No automatic acknowledgement
• Automatic acknowledgement of gone alarms
• Automatic acknowledgement of raised alarms
• Automatic acknowledgement of raised and gone alarms
• Manual Operator Response

The Suppress Audible Alarm box can be checked, to prevent the alarm source from initiating an alarm sound.

Signal Parameters

The Signal >> column can be expanded with a mouse-click. Additional columns Tag Name, Signal Item, Signal
Name and Designation will appear as shown in the following picture:

• Tag Name: The Signal Name is inherited directly from the AF Block Tag Name when the signal is defined,
but can be edited by the user. Any changes to the AF Block Tag Name will also be inherited, except in cases
where the signal Tag Name has already been manually changed by a user.
• Signal Item: A number assigned by the system, if one is required to make the signal definition unique. This
number can be edited by the user.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 175 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Signal Name: This is inherited from the port name, but can be edited by the user.
• Designation: Can be freely edited by the user.

This data can be displayed (see Connector Information) and also transferred to the archive.

If editing of the signal definition results in the creation of a new Global Connection, a Source Connector will be
automatically created for the signal.

A dependency may exist between parameters. If one parameter is changed it may be required that other
parameters are automatically changed. In this case, when the parameter sheet is saved, the user will be asked
to confirm these changes.

The contents of the dialog box can be printed.

3.6.3.1 Renaming AF Blocks and Proxies

AF Blocks and Proxies have a number of symbol properties associated with them which are contained in their masks.
These properties can be set in the symbol mask.

Alternatively, a function exists to quickly access and edit the Tag Name and Item of the symbol.

To rename an AF Block or Proxy proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the AF Block , Proxy or Pictogram.

Renaming the Tag Name and Item in a Pictogram on a Plant Display, will also rename its
corresponding AF Block or Proxy on the Function Diagram, and vice versa.

2. Click the right mouse button to open the context menu then select Rename from the context menu.
3. A dialog box will open containing the Tag Name and Tag Item of the symbol.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 176 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. Edit the Tag Name and Tag Item where required.

5. Click on Rename to save the changes, otherwise click on Cancel.
6. If the values of modules or signals within the symbol have been manually modified, the Interrupted
inheritance dialog box will appear.
The user is then given the option to overwrite the values or to leave the current values.

The combination of Tag Name and Tag Item must be unique. If the user attempts to enter a duplicate, the
system will automatically reassign it uniquely.

Multiple AF Blocks and Proxies can be selected and renamed with a common Tag Name. In this case the Tag
Item will remain unchanged to keep the combinations of Tag Names and Tag Items unique.

3.6.3.1.1 Inheritance for AF Block and Proxy Renaming

During the symbol renaming process, if the values of modules or signals within the diagram have been previously
manually modified, the Interrupted inheritance dialog box appears:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 177 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To restore inheritance and overwrite the existing assignments click on Yes, to retain these existing assignments click
on No, otherwise click on Cancel to cancel the renaming operation and return to the Rename Tag name dialog.

The contents of the dialog box can be printed.

3.6.3.2 Inheritance within AF Blocks and Proxies

Two different types of inheritance are available within Automation Functions and Hardware Proxies:

• Inheritance of Archive Parameters

• Inheritance of Alarm Text

3.6.3.2.1 Archive Parameter Inheritance within AF Blocks and Proxies

For some AF Blocks and Proxies, the Variation min, Variation max, Variation Percent and EU are inherited from the
input ports LL, UL, DB, and EU, respectively.

Inheritance of Archive parameters from the input Ports is indicated and modified by the check boxes. The functionality
of the check boxes is shown in the following sequence:

1. If the check box is selected...

Inheritance active
2. If the user deselects the check box...

Inheritance disabled
3. Modify the text within the field...

Content modified
4. Select the check box again. The modified value is overwritten by the original inherited value...

Inheritance restored

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 178 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.3.2.2 Alarm Text Inheritance within AF Blocks and Proxies

The Active Alarm Text and Deactive Alarm Text can be inherited from input Ports using standard and user defined
inheritance rules as defined in the Project Settings. These rules can be implemented in two different ways:

1. The rule for each alarm text can be inherited from the Default Rule setting of the specific block type.
2. The rule for each alarm text can be selected specifically from the list of available rules in a drop down list.

The option to insert free text in the field for the alarm text is always available.

3.6.3.2.2.1 Default Rule Inheritance Active

When new blocks are placed, the default rule governing Active Alarm Text and Deactive Alarm Text is inherited from
the default rule setting made in the Project View.

The inheritance of the default rule remains until the default rule inheritance link is broken (see below). Until that occurs,
changes to the default rule setting will be inherited to all existing placed blocks. If this link is broken, then the user may
still select an inheritance rule from the drop down list.

The state of active inheritance of the default rule is indistinguishable from the state of broken default rule inheritance.

If the default rule setting is <No Inheritance>, the field will appear empty:

If the default rule setting is set so that inheritance is enabled the field will display the inherited rule. This cell is grayed
out with the check box selected:

To remove the inheritance link click on the Active Alarm Text field. This will cause the setting to become active and
no longer grayed out:

The default rule inheritance link is still active and the port has been selected to produce an alarm when the condition is
reached.

The appearance of this is identical to the field if:

1. The default rule inheritance link was broken (in this example by deselecting the check box):

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 179 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. Then turning inheritance back on by selecting the check box and selecting the same rule from the drop down
list as the default rule:

The difference is that in the second case, the default Rule Inheritance link is broken and will not be updated if the
default rule setting is changed.

3.6.3.2.2.2 Manual Inheritance Rule Setting

Any modification of the Active Alarm Text or Deactive Alarm Text will break the default rule inheritance
specified for the block type.

This change in state is not announced by the system and the result is visually indistinguishable from the active
default rule inheritance.

Instead of relying on the default rule setting, the user may select a inheritance rule independent of the default.
Inheritance of Alarm Text based on rules constructed from the input Ports is indicated and modified by the check
boxes:

• Inheritance rule active

•

• The first rule in the drop down list is automatically displayed.

• Click in the field and a drop down list of all standard and user defined rules appears...
•

• Switch inheritance rule

• Select a new rule by clicking on an option...

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 180 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Different inheritance rule active

Any existing alarm text is overwritten and permanently lost.

3.6.4 Displaying the Plant Display Mapping

AF Blocks in Function Diagrams can be mapped to Pictograms and Faceplates in Plant Displays via process
connections. It is possible to view these mappings for individual AF Blocks in Function Diagrams.

To view a list of Plant Displays to which an AF Block has been mapped, proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the AF Block in the Function Diagram.

2. Select the View menu, then Display Plant Display Mapping from the drop down menu.
3. The Plant Display Mappings dialog box will appear, containing the following information:

1. The AF Block Tag Name and Tag Item.

2. A list of Plant Displays which contain Pictograms or Faceplates that the AF Block has been mapped
to. If there are no mappings, None will appear in the list.
4. Any Plant Display in the list can be opened in configuration mode, as follows:
o Double click on the Plant Display in the list, OR
o Click on the Plant Display to select it, then select the function from the context menu (Right Mouse
Click > Open in Configuration Mode).
5. When complete click on Close.

Alternatively select the function via the context menu (Right Mouse Click > Display Plant Display Mapping ).

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 181 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.5 Editing Links

It is necessary to establish links from Automation Functions and proxies engineered in a system for various purposes,
for example:

• Plant Manual
• Linked Documents

These links are created using a link editor in the Diagram Editor. To open the link editor proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the Automation Function in the diagram.

2. Select the Extras menu, then Edit Links from the drop down menu.
3. The Edit Links dialog box will open.

4. Select the appropriate sheet and edit as required.

5. Click on Ok to save the editing and close the link editor, otherwise click on Cancel.

Click on Apply to save the editing and continue.

The edited links will be created.

Alternatively, select the function via the context menu (right mouse click > Edit Links).

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 182 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.6 Connecting the Symbols

The Ports of symbols are connected using the Diagram Editor. In this way signals are sent and received between
symbols.

There are two types of connection:

• Local Connections: Connections made between symbols on the same Function Diagram.
• Global Connections: Connections made between symbols on different Function Diagrams.

3.6.6.1 Local Connections

Local connections are connections that are made between symbols on the same Function Diagram (as in the example
below).

These are made with SPPA-T3000 Connections. Two tools are available to make Local SPPA-T3000 Connections:

• Graphical Interactor
• Click Interactor

Symbols may only be connected using the graphic and click interactors. The links available on the links toolbar
may not be used for this purpose.

Inheritance

To ensure the consistency of engineered values between connected symbols, certain parameters are inherited
between connected symbols.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 183 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Other Functions

It is also possible to modify or delete local connections. Connections can be made to multiple destinations with local
connections.

3.6.6.1.1 Graphical Connection Interactor

To make a Local Connection with the Graphical Connection Interactor proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, the symbols to be connected have been placed in the diagram.

1. Click on the Connection (Graphical Interactor) icon on the toolbar.

2. Move the cursor over the source block, the Ports available for connection are highlighted.
3. Click on the source Port. A line is connected to the source Port.
4. As the cursor is moved the line moves with it.

5. Move the cursor to the destination block, the Ports available and suitable for connection are highlighted.
6. Click on the destination Port.

The connection is made.

Be sure to click inside the symbol when selecting the source or destination Port.

Connections will only be made if the Port types are consistent. It is not possible to connect Ports which have
different signal types (e.g. a binary output Port cannot be connected to an analog input Port).

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 184 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Connection (Graphical Interactor) can also be selected in permanent mode, connections can then be
made repeatedly.

3.6.6.1.2 Click Connection Interactor

To make a Local Connection with the Click Connection Interactor proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, the symbols to be connected have been placed in the diagram.

1. Click on the Connection (Click Interactor) icon on the toolbar.

2. Move the cursor over the source block, the Ports available for connection are highlighted.
3. Click on the source Port, the Port remains highlighted.

4. Move the cursor to the destination block, the Ports available and suitable for connection are highlighted.
5. Click on the destination Port.

The connection will be made.

Be sure to click inside the symbol when selecting the source or destination Port.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 185 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Connections will only be made if the Port types are consistent. It is not possible to connect Ports which have
different signal types.

The Connection (Click Interactor) can also be selected in permanent mode, connections can then be made
repeatedly.

3.6.6.1.3 Modifying Connections

Once a connection has been made it may be necessary to modify it. The routing of the connection, or the source or
destination Port can be changed.

Modifying Connection Routing

When a connection is created the system automatically routes the connection (i.e. decides the path the connector link
follows between source and destination). In some cases the user may wish to modify this routing, this can be done as
follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the connection to be modified. Note the small squares or handles on the connection.
2. Click on a handle and drag it to its new position.

The connection routing will be modified.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 186 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The automatic routing of a modified connection can be re-instated as follows:

Select the connection, then select the re-routing function from the context menu (Right Mouse Click > Reroute
Connection).

Modifying Connection Ports

To reconnect a connection source or destination Port proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the connection.

2. With the cursor positioned over the handle at the existing Port, click and hold the left mouse button, then drag
it to the new Port.

3. Release the left mouse button.

The connection will be reconnected.

3.6.6.1.4 Deleting Local Connections

After a local connection has been made it may be necessary to delete it.

To delete local connections proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, the connection to be deleted exists.

1. Select the connection to be deleted.

2. Handles will appear on the ends of the connection lines to be deleted.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 187 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1. If only part of a multiple connection is to be deleted, then click on the section to be deleted.
2. The color of the section to be deleted will change to green.

3. Select the Edit menu, then Delete from the drop down menu.
4. A dialog box appears to confirm the delete function.
5. To delete the connection click on Yes, otherwise click on No to cancel the function.

The selected connection is deleted from the diagram.

Alternatively, select the function with the Del key, or via the context menu (Right Mouse Click > Delete).

3.6.6.1.5 Multiple Local Connections

It may be necessary to connect the same source Port to many destination Ports, as in the example below.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 188 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To do this simply make further connections in the same way as the first connection was made (i.e. click on the source
Port, then the destination Port when making the connection).

Connections can only be made to AF Ports, not to existing connection lines.

3.6.6.2 Global Connections

Global Connections are connections between Function Diagrams (as in the example below).

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 189 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

For a description of the components of Global Connections i.e. connectors, signal definitions and how the connections
are made see Signal Connectors, Signal Definitions and Connections

It is possible to make Direct Connections between diagrams, or the Source Connector and Destination Connector can
be created independently.

Inheritance

To ensure the consistency of engineered values between connected symbols, certain parameters are inherited
between connected symbols.

Other Functions

Connectors can be edited, modified or deleted. Multiple signal destinations can be connected with global connectors.
There is a function to automatically convert local connections to global connections.

3.6.6.2.1 Signal Connectors, Signal Definitions and Connections

Connections between symbols can be made using signal connectors. Signal connectors and signal definitions are
described here, as well as the way in which the connections are established.

Signal Connectors

Signal connectors are either Source Connectors or Destination Connectors.

In the example below a Global Connection has been made between two Function Diagrams. The Source Connector is
connected to the signal source, and the Destination Connector is connected to the signal destination. The Connectors
contain information about the signal.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 190 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

It is possible to connect one Source Connector to many Destination Connectors. A Destination Connector can only be
connected to one Source Connector.

Signal Definition and Signal Settings

A signal definition can be created for output Ports of AF Blocks, proxies and Macros in Function Diagrams in the
Diagram Editor. The signal definition uniquely identifies the signal. When creating Source Connectors the signal
definition and signal settings are assigned automatically according to the connected Port of the source symbol.

The signal definition consists of the three fields :

• Tag Name
• Signal Item
• Signal Name

The other signal settings consist of:

• Designation
• Upper and Lower Limits (for analog signals)
• Unit (for analog signals)
• Setting (for binary signals)

The signal definition and signal settings can be edited at either the source connector or the source symbol parameter
mask.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 191 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Making Connections with Connectors

A connection is established between a Source Connector and a Destination Connector when the signal definition of
the source signal is entered in the Destination Connector.

With direct Global Connections the source and destination connectors are created and connected automatically.

When the source connectors and destination connectors are made independently, the connectors can be edited by the
user to close the connection.

In the Diagram Editor the connection state is indicated by the connector color.

3.6.6.2.2 Direct Global Connections

Global Connections can be made directly. With this function it is only necessary to click on the source and destination
Ports on the two diagrams, the signal connectors and the signal definition are created automatically.

To make a direct Global Connection proceed as follows:

The source and destination Function Diagrams are open in the Diagram Editor, the symbols to be connected have
been placed in the diagrams.

1. In the Source Diagram :

1. Select the window of the source diagram.
2. Click on the Connection (Click Interactor) icon.

3. Move the cursor over the source block, the Ports available for connection are highlighted.
4. Click on the source Port. The selected Port is highlighted.
2. In the Destination Diagram :
1. Select the window of the destination diagram.
2. Move the cursor to the destination block, the Ports available and suitable for connection are
highlighted.
3. Click on the destination Port.

The Source Connector and Destination Connector are created.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 192 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

When selecting the source or destination Port, click inside the symbol.

The connection state is indicated by the connector color.

The Connection (Click Interactor) can also be selected in permanent mode, connections can then be made
repeatedly.

3.6.6.2.3 Make Source Connector

Source Connectors can be made individually.

To make a Source Connector proceed as follows:

The Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, the symbol for the signal source has been placed in the diagram.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 193 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1. Click on the Connection (Click Interactor) icon.

2. Move the cursor over the source block, the Ports available for connection are highlighted.
3. Click on the source Port. The selected Port is highlighted.
4. Move the cursor over the diagram, a block indicating the outline of a Source Connector moves with the
cursor.
5. Click the mouse button when the Source Connector is satisfactorily positioned.

The global Source Connector is created, connected to the source Port.

The signal definition is automatically generated. This can be edited.

The connection state is indicated by the connector color.

The Connection (Click Interactor) can also be selected in permanent mode, connections can then be made
repeatedly.

When Source and Destination Connectors are created independently, Global Connections can be made
between symbols in the same Function Diagram.

3.6.6.2.4 Make Destination Connector

A Destination Connector can be made individually.

To make a Destination Connector proceed as follows:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 194 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, the symbol for the signal destination has been placed in the
diagram.

1. Click on the Connection (Click Interactor) icon.

2. Move the cursor over the destination block, the Ports available for connection are highlighted.
3. Click on the destination Port. The selected Port is highlighted.
4. Move the cursor over the diagram, a block indicating the outline of a Destination Connector moves with the
cursor.
5. Click the mouse button when the Destination Connector is satisfactorily positioned.

The global Destination Connector is created, connected to the destination Port.

The signal definition is empty when the Destination Connector is created, this can be edited.

The connection state is indicated by the connector color.

The Connection (Click Interactor) can also be selected in permanent mode, connections can then be made
repeatedly.

When Source and Destination Connectors are created independently, Global Connections can be made on the
same Function Diagram.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 195 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.6.2.5 Editing Signal Connectors

A signal connector containing the signal definition and signal settings can be edited. The procedures are described for
editing:

• Source Connectors: This involves changing the signal definition or signal settings.
• Destination Connectors: Making or breaking connections can be done manually or automatically using the
signal browser function.

3.6.6.2.5.1 Editing Source Connectors

To edit Source Connectors, proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the Source Connector to be edited.

2. Open the connector mask.
3. The Edit Signal Definition dialog box appears. Below are examples of:
o An analog signal
o

o
o A binary signal

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 196 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

When a field in the signal Source Connector is edited, the corresponding field in the source symbol is
also changed.

4. If the signal is connected (i.e. if a corresponding Destination Connector exists) the following conditions apply:
o If a field in the signal definition (Tag Name, Signal Item or Signal Name) is changed, a dialog will
appear to confirm if all the corresponding Destination Connectors should also be changed (i.e. the connection
kept closed).
o If a signal setting (designation, upper or lower limit, unit or setting) is changed, all Destination
Connectors will be updated automatically.
5. If the signal is not connected (i.e. no corresponding Destination Connector exists) any field can be changed
without affecting any Destination Connectors.
6. Click on Save to effect any changes, otherwise click on Cancel.

The section at the bottom of the Edit Source Signal dialog box is for selecting the Connector Information to
be displayed.

3.6.6.2.5.2 Editing Destination Connectors

To edit Destination Connectors proceed as follows:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 197 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the Destination Connector to be edited.

2. Open the connector mask.
3. The Edit Source Signal dialog box appears. Below are examples of:
o An analog signal
o

o
o A binary signal

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 198 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

o
4. If the signal is connected (i.e. if a corresponding Source Connector exists) the following conditions apply:
o If a field in the signal definition (Tag Name, Signal Item or Signal Name) is changed, the connection
will be opened.
o The signal settings (designation, upper or lower limit, unit or setting) cannot be changed, they are
dependent on the Source Connector.
5. If the signal is not connected (i.e. no corresponding Source Connector exists) any field can be changed
without affecting any Source Connectors.
6. The fields can be edited either manually, or the Signal browser can be used to search for, and connect to an
existing source signal:
1. Click on the browse button to the right of the Tag Name field.

2. The Signal Browser will open.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 199 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Select the Project Node, or diagram to be searched in the left hand Frame in the Signal Browser
dialog box (navigate through the tree if necessary). This Node or diagram will appear in the Search
Node field.
4. Enter a search pattern in the Search Pattern field. This pattern corresponds to the signal Tag
Name. The search pattern can contain an asterisk (*) for wild card searches.
5. Click on Start Search.
6. The signals found in the search are shown in a list at the bottom of the dialog box (if none are found
a message is given).

7. Select the required signal from the list by clicking on it.

8. Click on OK. The fields in the Edit Source Signal dialog box will be automatically entered.
7. Click on Save to effect any changes, otherwise click on Cancel.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 200 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

If a connection is made to a source signal for which no Source Connector exists, then the Source Connector
will be automatically generated.

The section at the bottom of the Edit Source Signal dialog box is for selecting the Connector Information to
be displayed.

3.6.6.2.6 Modifying Global Connections

When Source Connectors or Destination Connectors have been made, it may be necessary to modify them. The
source or destination Port that the Connector is connected to can be changed.

To modify connections to either Source Connectors or Destination Connectors proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, containing a connector that needs modifying.

1. Select the connection between the symbol and the connector. Note the small squares or handles on the
connection.
2. Click and hold with the cursor over the handle at the symbol Port (the cursor will change to a small cross).

3. Drag the cursor to the new Port, then release the mouse button.
4. The connection will be modified.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 201 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The connection routing between the Port and the Source or Destination Connector can also be modified.

The connection state is not affected when a Connector is modified. Corresponding source and destination Connectors
will remain connected.

Modifying Source Connectors

Modifying a Source Connector has the following effects:

• The signal is removed from the original source symbol (i.e. in the parameter mask the signal is deactivated).
• The signal is automatically assigned to the new Source Port.

3.6.6.2.7 Deleting Global Connectors

After a Global Connection has been made it may be necessary to delete the Source Connector or Destination
Connector.

To delete global connectors proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, that contains a connector that needs to be deleted.

1. Select the connector symbol to be deleted (the connection line from the symbol to the connector can also be
selected).
2. Select the Edit menu, then Delete from the drop down menu.
3. A dialog box appears to confirm the delete function.
4. To delete the connector click Yes, otherwise to cancel the function click on No.

The connector is deleted from the diagram.

Note the following:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 202 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Connected Source When a connected Source Connector is deleted, the signal is also removed from the
Connector source symbol (i.e. in the parameter mask the signal is deactivated).

If this signal is defined as an Alarm Source, or is archived, the user is given an

opportunity to reverse the action.

Unconnected Source When an unconnected Source Connector is deleted, the signal is not removed from
Connector the source symbol (i.e. in the parameter mask the signal remains defined).

If this signal is defined as an Alarm Source, or is archived, the user may decide if the
signal is deleted or not.

Alternatively, select delete with the Del key, or via the context menu (Right Mouse Click > Delete).

3.6.6.2.8 Multiple Global Connections

It may be necessary to connect the same source Port to many destination Ports, as in the example below.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 203 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To do this simply make further connections in the same way as the first connection was made (i.e. click on the source
Port, then the destination Port when making the connection).

Connections can only be made to AF Ports, not to existing connection lines or to signal connectors.

3.6.6.2.9 Converting Connections

Connections within a single Function Diagram can be made either as:

• Local Connections (i.e. simple links between the Ports).

• Global Connections (using Source Connectors and Destination Connectors in the same diagram).

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 204 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Functions are provided to convert connections within a single Function Diagram between these two types of
connection.

Convert to Connector

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor. A link type connection exists.

1. Select the link connection.

2. Select the Edit menu, then Convert to Connector from the drop down menu.
3. The connection will be converted to a connection with a Source Connector and a Destination Connector.

Convert Connector to Link

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor. A connection with a Source Connector and Destination Connector exists.

1. Select the Destination Connector.

2. Select the Edit menu, then Convert Connector to link from the drop down menu.
3. The connection will be changed to a link type connection.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 205 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. If the remaining Source Connector is left open, it can be deleted.

3.6.6.3 Making Port References

Port References are used to make external connections to Macros and Compound Components.

Port References can be connected to either AF Block input or output Ports.

To make a Port Reference proceed as follows:

The Function Diagram for the Macro or Compound Component is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Click on the Port Reference icon on the toolbar.

2. Move the cursor over the AF Block from which the Port Reference is to be made and the Ports available for
connection are highlighted.
3. Click on the Port to which the Port Reference is required.
4. A Port Reference will appear connected to the Port. Drag the connector to the desired position.

The Port Reference that is created will automatically have a Port Definition assigned to it. The Port Definitions can be
edited in Macros and Compound Components if required.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 206 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

In a Macro it is possible to connect the same Port Reference to multiple input ports. When the same Port
Reference is used for more than one input Port, the respective Values of the Ports must be equal. This is
necessary so that the system can set the Value for the Macro Port.

The Port Reference icon can also be selected in permanent mode, from which connections can then be made
repeatedly.

3.6.6.4 Connection Routing

SPPA-T3000 comes with a function that automatically routes connections between AF Blocks, which reduces work for
the user. The objectives of the algorithm behind this function, are to minimize instances of overlapping lines, crossing
of lines, or lines being drawn across other AF Blocks.

This section discusses:

• how to enable and disable the connection routing function for individual Function Diagram and for individual
connections on a Function Diagram.
• how to arrange the AF Blocks on a Function Diagram to optimize the results of the connection routing
function.
• the Layout Parameters that can be edited for connection routing function.

3.6.6.4.1 How to Enable and Disable Automatic Connection Routing

The default setting on every Function Diagram is to automatically perform the connection routing. This means that the
routing algorithm will be executed whenever a Function Diagram is opened, or changed (i.e. an AF block is moved,
added or deleted, or a new connection is added). The algorithm will recalculate the connections of the whole function
diagram and redraw them accordingly. The default setting can be changed, on individual diagrams, so that the user
can control when to perform the connection routing algorithm. The user has the option to :

• Enable or Disable the Automatic Execution of the Algorithm

• Manually Initiate the Connection Routing Algorithm
• Disable the Connection Routing Algorithm on Individual Connections

Enabling or Disabling the Automatic Execution of the Connection Routing Algorithm

To enable or disable the automatic execution of the connection routing algorithm, on individual diagrams, proceed as
follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the Tools menu, then Graph Layout , then Hyperlink Layout from the drop down menus.
2. Select the Tools menu, then Graph Layout, then Parameters from the drop down menus.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 207 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. The Graph Layout Parameter dialog will open.

4. In the dialog, set autoLayout to:

o True to execute the routing algorithm after every change to the Function Diagram.
o False to only execute the routing algorithm when it is manually initiated.

The default setting of the autoLayout property is True.

Manually Initiating the Connection Routing Algorithm

To manually initiate the connection routing algorithm, on individual diagrams, proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the Tools menu, then Graph Layout , then Hyperlink Layout from the drop down menu.
2. Select the Tools menu, then Graph Layout, then Perform Layout from the drop down menus.

A manual initiation of the algorithm can be done when autoLayout is set to either True or False.

Disable the Connection Routing Algorithm on Individual Connections

When a connection is manually modified in a Function Diagram, the connection will not be recalculated on subsequent
executions of the routing algorithm.

3.6.6.4.2 Arranging Automation Function Blocks on a Diagram

Optimal Function Diagram Layouts

To optimize the results of the connection routing function, AF Blocks should be arranged on a diagram according to the
Column Layout. If the routing algorithm can clearly identify regions on the Function Diagram with the column layout,
the algorithm can more effectively minimize overlapping lines, crossing lines, and lines crossing over other AF Blocks.
The layout options are described below:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 208 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Column Layout

Follow the guidelines below as much as possible to create the column layout:

• Arrange the AF Blocks in identifiable columns with sufficient space between each column. The column does
not have to be only one AF block wide. A column may be several AF Blocks wide.
• Horizontally stagger the AF Blocks between columns.
• Connections should be made between columns and not within columns.
• At least one horizontal area of free space should be provided.

Multiple Regions on a Function Diagram

By default, the connection routing algorithm will consider separate rows of pages of the Function Diagram to be
separate regions. It will try to locate a single column layout in each region. The algorithm performs separate routing
calculations for each region.

An example illustrating separate regions in separate rows is shown here:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 209 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The algorithm's objectives can sometimes be easier to achieve if the algorithm identifies multiple column layouts on a
single page. The algorithm will be able to create multiple regions on a page if large empty horizontal areas exists within
the page that separate multiple column formats. Or if the minAdditionalBordersPerPage layout parameter is set to a
number greater than 0.

Layouts to Avoid

Less than optimal connection routing may result from the following AF Block arrangements:

• AF Blocks are placed too close together:

•

• Not enough horizontal staggering if the blocks are placed relatively close together:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 210 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Not creating distinguishable columns. The algorithm will identify the blocks as being in one large column:
•

• AF Blocks are placed on page breaks of a multiple page Function Diagram.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 211 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.6.4.3 Layout Parameters

Layout Parameters

The Hyperlink Layout of the Graph Layout routes connections between AF Blocks. When this Graph Layout is
performed the connection routing algorithm is executed.

Parameters can be modified on the Graph Layout Parameter dialog which influences the way in which the connections
are calculated by the routing algorithm. The default settings are shown below:

The default parameter settings will be sufficient for relatively uncomplicated Function Diagrams.

• autoLayout: True enables the automatic execution of connection routing algorithm.

• calcAdditionalBordersEnabled: True enables the algorithm that creates multiple regions on the same page
of the Function Diagram if an empty horizontal space is detected.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 212 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• checkBordersEnabled: True enables the algorithm to create a region that overlaps two pages, if an AF has
been placed on a page border.
• eliminateOverlapsEnabled: True enables the algorithm to minimize crossing and overlapping of connection
lines.
• eliminateStairCasesEnabled: True enables the algorithm to minimize connections being drawn in a form
resembling a staircase.
• eliminateUShapedEnabled: True enables the algorithm to minimize connections being drawn in a form
resembling a U.
• gridEnabled: True enables the algorithm draws connections on the routing grid.
• horizontalGridBase: The value determines how far the routing grid is horizontally shifted from the diagram
grid.
• horizontalGridOffset: The value determines the horizontal resolution of the routing grid .
• horizontalMinOffset: The value determines the minimum distance between horizontal connections and other
entities on the page (e.g. AF blocks, connection lines).
• maxNumberOfEliminationIterations: The maximum iterations that the eliminateOverlap,
eliminateStaircase, and eliminateUShape algorithms will be performed. A higher value will result closer to
optimum routing layouts, but at the expense of processing time.
• maxSlotSize:This value defines the column width in pixels. A new column will not be detected if the AF
Blocks are arranged in the column of this width or less.
• minAdditionBordersPerPage: This is the minimum number of regions which algorithm has to create on a
single page. Increasing the number of regions may help the algorithm achieve better results.
• parametersUpToDate: This is an internal variable. Leave as default value.
• properCheckEnabled: This is an internal variable. Leave as default value.
• relaxedGridRoutingEnabled: True allows lines to be drawn between points on the routing grid.
• verticalGridBase: This value determines how far the routing grid is vertically shifted from the diagram grid.
• verticalGridOffset: This value determines the vertical resolution of the routing grid.
• verticalMinOffset: The value determines the minimum distance between vertical connections and other
entities on the page (e.g. AF blocks, connection lines).
• Expert check box: This is a standard check box for parameter sheets. It has no function for this parameter
sheet.

Note that the routing grid and the diagram grid are two different grids. The routing algorithm draws
connections along the routing grid. The position and resolution of the routing grid are determined by the
Hyperlink Layout parameters.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 213 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To match the routing grid to the diagram grid use the following settings:

horizontalGridBase= 0

horizontalGridOffset= Horizontal Spacing of the diagram grid

verticalGridBase= 0

verticalGridOffset= Vertical Spacing of the diagram grid

3.6.6.5 Inheritance Between Connected Symbols

To ensure the consistency of engineered values between connected symbols, certain parameters are inherited
between connected symbols.

The inheritance of these parameters is triggered and updated during any of these actions:

• Connection of symbols with inheritable parameters

• Modification of inherited parameters in the source symbol.

Modification of inherited parameters in the destination symbol will break the inheritance.

Once inheritance is broken in the destination symbol, the inheritance is lost until the existing connection is
deleted and a new connection is made.

• Import of Project Nodes or Diagrams where connections are closed.

The inheritance of parameters between symbols is established through a single connection.

Inheritance Information

When inheritance of parameters between connected symbols leads to a parameter change, the changes are
previewed in a dialog box:

Triggering of Action Content of Information Dialog Box

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 214 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Connection of Symbols

Modification of Parameter in
Source Symbol

Import of Project Nodes or

Diagrams

The only scenario where the inheritance described in the dialog box can be canceled is during the modification of
parameter in the source symbol. Otherwise the dialog box is for information purposes only.

3.6.6.5.1 The Inheritance Connection Between Connected Symbols

Inheritance Chain

The inheritance connection is established by interconnecting symbols that have inheritable parameters. Without having
to connect the upper limit (UL), lower limit (LL), or engineering unit (EU) ports directly, these values are transferred to
the destination symbol automatically:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 215 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The inheritance of parameters continues in a chain until the inheritance is interrupted. Symbols connected after the
interruption will not inherit the parameters from the original source:

In the interrupted chain example above, a new inheritance chain begins when symbols that have inheritable
parameters are connected:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 216 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Multiple Input Ports

When connecting two source symbols to a single destination, all having inheritable parameters, the system checks to
make sure that both source symbols have the same values for their inheritable parameters. If not, the second
connection will not be possible:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 217 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.6.5.2 AF Blocks and Proxies with Inheritance

The first table lists Hardware Proxies that are sources of inheritable parameters. The second table lists Automation
Functions that are can be either destinations or sources (or both) of inheritable parameters. The Connectable Port
column indicates the port over which inheritance is realized.

Source (Only) of Inheritable Parameters

AF ID AF Name Inheritance Ports Connectable Port
UL Port LL Port EU Port
116 COUNTER UL LL n/a OUT
145006 CONV_AI1 AI01_UL AI01_LL AI01_EU AI01_PV
711004 SEE_WRITE_F n/a n/a sEU OUT
711006 SEE_READ_F n/a n/a sEU OUT
730002 M_AddFEM_POCO_ANALOG IO AIxx_UL AIxx_LL AIxx_sEU AIxx_PV
730003 M_AddFEM_POCO DIGITAL IO n/a n/a FI0x_sEU (Hz,RPM) FIxx_PV
730012 R_AddFEM_POCO_ANALOG IO AIxx_UL AIxx_LL AIxx_sEU AIxx_PV
730013 R_AddFEM_POCO DIGITAL IO n/a n/a FI01_sEU (Hz, RPM) FIxx_PV
750003 S7_SM331_7KF02 AIxx_UL AIxx_LL AIxx_EU AIxx_PV
750006 S7_SM331_7SF00 AIxx_UL AIxx_LL AIxx_EU AIxx_PV
750008 S7_SM331_7PF10 AIxx_UL AIxx_LL AIxx_EU AIxx_PV
750016 S7_SM331_7KB02 AIxx_UL AIxx_LL AIxx_EU AIxx_PV
750017 S7_SM331_7NF00 AIxx_UL AIxx_LL AIxx_EU AIxx_PV

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 218 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

750018 S7_SM331_7PF00 AIxx_UL AIxx_LL AIxx_EU AIxx_PV

750022 S7_SM331_7NF10 AIxx_UL AIxx_LL AIxx_EU AIxx_PV
750024 S7_SM331_7TF00_HART AIxx_UL AIxx_LL AIxx_EU AIxx_PV
760018 FUM_ASMON UL LL EU OUT
760032 FUM_TTMON UL LL EU OUT
760055 FD_CCTRL UL LL EU OUT

Destinations and Sources of Inheritable Parameters

AF AF Name Inheritance Ports Connectable Port
ID UL LL EU Port
Port Port
19 DERIV UL LL n/a IN (as destination)
OUT (as source)
20 INT UL LL n/a IN (as destination)
OUT (as source)
27 CONV n/a n/a EU_IN (via IN) IN (as destination)
EU_OUT (over OUT) OUT (as source)
200 ASMON UL LL EU IN (as destination)
OUT (as source)
202 ANA UL LL EU IN (as destination)
OUT (as source)
205 ASEL3 UL LL EU INx (as destination)
OUT (as source)
206 ASEL2 UL LL EU INx (as destination)
OUT (as source)
250 ASMON_R UL LL EU INx (as destination)
OUT (as source)
300 PID UL LL n/a TRACK_V (as destination)
OUT (as source)
302 SPADJ UL LL EU TRACK_V (as destination)
OUT (as source)
303 CCTRL UL LL EU TRACK_V (as destination)
OUT (as source)
307 SP_AV UL LL EU SP (as destination)
OUT (as source)
605 LEVEL UL LL EU IN (as destination)
OUT (as source)

The CONV Automation Function acts both a source and destination for inheritance depending on the port
involved.

The value at the output EU_OUT is transferred to symbol connected to its output OUT.

The value at the input EU_IN is inherited from the input IN from connected symbols.

3.6.7 Symbol Appearance

When working with Function Diagrams and Plant Displays in the Diagram Editor, additional information concerning
symbols like AF Blocks, Connectors or Pictograms can be conveyed to the user. A lot of information is made available
at a glance.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 219 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

AF Block and connector information can be viewed as text in the Diagram. Information regarding the Status of AF
Blocks and connectors (e.g. if the logic is active), is represented using color. The connection state (i.e. if a connector is
open or closed), is also represented using color.

Similar symbol information is provided in Dynamic Function Diagrams.

3.6.7.1 AF Block Information

AF Block Information is made available as text in the Function Diagrams. The user can select which information to
make visible.

The visibility of AF Block information is stored individually for each diagram (whenever the diagram is closed).
The same AF Block information is also made available in the Dynamic Function Diagram.

The following symbol information can be viewed:

Tag Names

Tag Names are shown at the left hand top side of the AF Blocks (The Tag Name and Item are shown).

This function can also be used for Pictograms in Plant Displays. The Tag Name of the AF Block to which a
Pictogram is mapped will be displayed.

Symbol Comments

Symbol comments are shown at the right hand top side of the AF Blocks.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 220 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Parameter Values

Parameter Values can be made visible.

Port Information

The following information is shown next to output Ports.

• An asterisk (*) when the Port is selected for archiving.

• For signals defined as Alarms:
o The active alarm text.
o The abbreviated Alarm Type.
o The signal name.

Cycle Times

Cycle times are shown at the right hand bottom side of the AF Blocks.

Sequence Numbers

The sequence numbers are shown at the left hand bottom side of the AF Blocks. The sequence numbers show the
order in which the logic in a Function Diagram is executed. This may be useful for in-depth analysis of logic where the
execution sequence is critical. If the component has been manually scheduled, it will appear with a red border.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 221 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

If changes are made to a diagram the sequence numbers will be deselected automatically. This is done because the
sequence numbers will then be re-allocated during transaction handling. For this reason the sequence numbers can
only be made visible after a Function Diagram has been opened.

The execution sequence of Macros is indicated by the first and last sequence numbers of AF Blocks within the
Macro.

Making the Symbol Information Visible

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the View menu, then the desired Symbol Information from the drop down menu.
2. The Symbol Information will now appear in the Function Diagrams in the position described above.
• When the menu option has been selected a tick appears on the left hand side of the View drop down menu.
• To make Symbol Information invisible, select the item again from the drop down menu. The tick will also
disappear.

3.6.7.2 AF Block Parameters

There are two options for the display of AF Block parameters in Function Diagrams. The display option is selected by
the setting of Show Parameters as Ports in the user and the project symbol style settings.

Displaying as Ports

When this option Show Parameters as Ports is selected, an input Port is displayed in the AF Block for each Port
which is:

• Defined as a visible Port, and

• defined as a visible parameter.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 222 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

When the parameters are made visible, they are displayed on the left hand side of the input Port.

Displaying Separately

When this option Show Parameters as Ports is not selected, an input Port is displayed in the AF Block for each Port
which is identified as a visible Port.

When the parameters are made visible:

• Those of visible Ports are displayed on the left hand side of the input Port.
• Those of visible parameters are listed below the right hand corner of the AF Block.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 223 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Parameter values correspond to the status indication colors. If a parameter in an activated AF Block is
changed, the parameter value will change color to black in the diagram. In this way, the user can see that the
parameter has been changed but is not yet activated. When the change is activated, the parameter value will
change color to blue in the diagram.

3.6.7.3 Connector Information

Connector Information is made available as text in the Function Diagrams. The connector information is shown for both
Source Connectors and Destination Connectors.

Each connector always has at least the signal Tag Name and Signal Name visible inside the connector. All other
information is optional and can be selected by the user.

Source Connector Destination Connector

The destination connector also contains the drawing page

number of the source connector.

The various components of the signal definition are separated by a tag separator.

Item

Signal Items are shown inside the connector.

Source Connector Destination Connector

The destination connector also contains the drawing page

number of the source connector.

Designation and Setting

The designation and setting are shown on the right hand side. For analog signals the upper and lower limit and the unit
are shown.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 224 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Source Connector Destination Connector

The destination connector also contains the drawing page

number of the source connector.

Source and Destination

Signal sources and destinations can be displayed.

• For Source Connectors: All the signal destinations are shown, along with the drawing page number of the
destinations. Destinations on the same diagram are shown in square brackets [.....].
• For Destination Connectors: Only the signal source is shown. The destination connector also contains the
drawing page number of the source connector.

There are three modes for showing the source/destination:

Diagram name and designation (2 lines).

Source Connector Destination Connector

Diagram name and module name (1 line).

Source Connector Destination Connector

This mode is particularly useful for viewing multiple destinations which are on the same diagram.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 225 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Full Information (2 lines).

Source Connector Destination Connector

Making the Connector Information Visible

The connector information is shown by default as set in the user and project specific styles for connectors.

For individual Function Diagrams the connector information to be shown can be set via the View menu.

• Show All Signal Data: The Designation and Setting, and Source/Destination will be shown.
• Show Signal Settings: The Designation and Setting will be shown.

For individual connectors the connector information to be shown can be set via the connector mask.

3.6.7.4 Internal Connectors

Internal connectors only appear on printed Function Diagrams and on generated Individual Level Diagrams. Internal
connectors are used for connections between AF blocks on different pages of the same Function Diagram.

Internal Source Connector Internal Destination Connector

The connector information has the following format:

a/b

Where:

• a is an ID number unique to the connection between two AF blocks in the same diagram.
• b is the page number in the Function Diagram of the source/destination.

The example above shows connection with ID 12, between AF blocks on page 2 and page 1 of the Function Diagram.

3.6.7.5 Status Indication

Color is used in Function Diagrams to indicate the status of the symbols. The user can see at a glance which logic is
active and running in the Runtime Container, or which logic is being added or deleted, or is uncommitted.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 226 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The colors used for the status indication can be modified to suit user preference, and are adjustable in the
project and user settings.

All Symbols

The following appearances apply to all symbols in Function Diagrams.

Active Symbols

Active symbols are represented with a blue color.

Active changed Symbols

Active symbols, which have been changed are represented with a dark blue color.

New Symbols

New symbols which are added to the logic (e.g. new AF Blocks, new connections), and are not yet activated are
represented with a black color.

Deleted Symbols

Active symbols which have been deleted are represented with a light gray color.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 227 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

After the changes are activated these deleted symbols disappear.

Uncommitted Symbols

Uncommitted symbols in a Function Diagram can be viewed as follows:

A Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

• Select the View menu, then Show Uncommitted Modules from the drop down menu.

The uncommitted symbols in the diagram will be represented with a green color.

During this mode the color representation for active symbols will not be in operation.

The uncommitted symbols will only be displayed temporarily, until some other action is carried out in the Diagram
Editor.

S7 Hardware Proxies

The following appearances apply to S7 Hardware Proxies, and inform users about the status of the hardware
configuration.

Needs Hardware Configuration

A hardware configuration needs to be carried out for the symbol.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 228 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Needs Load Hardware

A load hardware needs to be carried out for the symbol.

Needs Load Connections

A load connections needs to be carried out for the symbol.

Turbine (FM458) and Fail Safe Symbols

The following appearances apply to turbine (FM458) and fail safe symbols.

Fail Safe Symbols

All fail safe symbols have a yellow background.

Needs Loading

Fail safe or turbine (FM458) symbols that require loading.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 229 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.7.6 Connection State Indication

Source Connectors and Destination Connectors may have open or closed connections.

The state of a connection (i.e. if it is open or closed), is indicated by the color of the connector symbol.

Symbol Color Connection State

Yellow Open
White Closed

Open Connection :

Closed Connection :

3.6.8 Macros
Macros consist of user developed logic which is grouped together as a single unit and may have signal input and
output. In this way the user can create functions which are represented in Function Diagrams as single blocks which
look the same as, and can be connected in the same way as AF Blocks.

Using Macros has the following advantages:

• Reuse of Logic: The same logic can be easily reproduced and used many times.
• Simplicity: Unnecessary details are hidden, making the overall functionality clearer.

Macros are described as follows:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 230 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

There are various options for creating Macros, both the logic and connections to Macros are created. When a Macro
has been created, it can be stored in the SPPA-T3000 Library, and from there placed into diagrams. The logic in a
Macro can be modified or deleted in the same way as any Function Diagram.

Macros are similar to Compound Components. But there are some fundamental differences as to how the two
entities are handled in the system. The user should be aware of these differences to decide whether a Macro
or Compound Component should be used for a specific application.

3.6.8.1 Creating Macros

The user can create Macros which contain embedded logic. The logic is then represented as a single element in the
diagram. There are three options for creating Macros:

• Embedded Macro: Simply reduces selected logic to a single block.

• Macro from Selection: Makes selected logic available in the library for reuse as a Macro.
• Macro from Diagram: Makes a Macro from a complete Function Diagram. The Macro is made available in the
library and connection points can be made available in the Macro using Macro Port References
• Converting a Compound Component to a Macro: Converts a Compound Component to a Macro in the
Library.

The logic used to create Macros can consist of AF Blocks or even other Macros i.e. Macros themselves may
contain other Macros.

3.6.8.1.1 Embedded Macro

The user can select blocks in a Function Diagram and make an embedded Macro from the selection. All the selected
logic is then reduced to a single block in the diagram. All signal connections to and from the embedded Macro remain
intact.

To create an embedded Macro proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the logic to be contained in the embedded Macro.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 231 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. Select the Edit menu, then Macro , then Move to embedded Macro from the drop down menus.

Alternatively, select the function via the Context Menu (Right Mouse Click > Macro , then Move to
embedded Macro ).

3. A dialog box appears. Enter a name for the embedded Macro, then click on OK, otherwise to cancel the
function click on Cancel.

Illegal characters are not permitted in the name.

The embedded Macro will now be created, this has the following effects:

• In the diagram the logic is reduced to a single block.

•

• A new Function Diagram is created automatically which contains the logic in the Macro. This diagram opens
automatically in the Diagram Editor. Signals entering and leaving the Macro are made automatically with
Macro Port References.
• The Function Diagram containing the Macro will appear in the Tree View of the Project View. When the
diagram is selected in the Tree View all Macros contained in the diagram appear in the List View.

3.6.8.1.2 Macro from Selection

The user can select blocks in a Function Diagram and make a Macro from the selection. In this way the Macro is
saved in its own diagram, and also appears in the library from where it can be placed into Function Diagrams.

To create a Macro from a selection proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the logic to be contained in the Macro.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 232 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. Select the Edit menu, then Macro , then Macro from selection from the drop down menus.

Alternatively, select the function via the Context Menu (Right Mouse Click > Macro , then Macro
from selection).

3. A dialog box appears.

1. First select the Library Node in which the Macro is to be stored, by clicking on it in the dialog box. A
new Library Node can be created if required.
2. Enter a Macro Name.

Illegal characters are not permitted in the name.

3. Click on OK, otherwise click on Cancel

The Macro will now be created, this has the following effects:

• The Macro is stored in the selected Library Node.

• In the diagram the selected logic remains unchanged.
• The Macro is created automatically as a new Function Diagram which contains the logic in the Macro. The
Macro opens automatically in the Diagram Editor. The Macro can be edited if required, and Macro Port
References can be added.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 233 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• The Macro will appear in the SPPA-T3000 Library. The Macro can then be used as often as required in
Function Diagrams.

3.6.8.1.3 Macro from Diagram

The user can design a Macro in a Function Diagram, and store the complete diagram as a Macro. Macro Port
References can be created to allow signal interchange when the Macro is later placed in a diagram.

There are two methods for creating the Macro:

• Using an existing Function Diagram.

• Creating a new Macro in the Project View.

Both methods are described:

Macro from Existing Function Diagram

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Create the logic for the Macro. Macro Port References are used for signals to and from the Macro.
2. Select the Edit menu, then Macro , then Macro from diagram from the drop down menus.

Alternatively, select the function via the context menu (Right Mouse Click > Macro , then Macro from
diagram).

3. A dialog box appears.

1. Select the Library Node in which the Macro is to be stored by clicking on it

2. The Macro Name can be edited. The Function Diagram name is set as a default.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 234 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Illegal characters are not permitted in the name.

3. Click on Ok, otherwise click on Cancel.

The Macro will now be created, this has the following effects:

• The Macro is stored in the selected Library Node. The name of the Macro is the same as that of the Function
Diagram
• The Macro is created automatically as a new Function Diagram which contains the logic in the Macro. The
Macro opens automatically in the Diagram Editor.
• The Macro will appear in the SPPA-T3000 Library. The Macro can then be used as often as required in
Function Diagrams.

Create a New Macro in the Project View

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Library Node under which the Macro is to be stored (in either the Tree View or the List View) by
clicking on it.
2. Select the Project menu, then New, then Macro from the drop down menus.

Alternatively, you can select the function via the context menu (Right Mouse Click > Create New
Macro ).

3. A dialog box appears.

4. Enter a Macro Name.

5. Click on Ok, otherwise click on Cancel.

A Macro will be created in the selected Library Node.

Creating the Macro in this way has the following effects:

• The Macro which has been created contains no logic. The Macro must be edited in the Diagram Editor to
create the logic.
• The Macro will appear in the SPPA-T3000 Library. The Macro can then be used as often as required in
Function Diagrams.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 235 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.8.1.4 Convert a Compound Component to a Macro

Macros can be created by converting Compound Components. This can be carried out in two ways:

• A Compound Component on a Function Diagram can be converted. Only the Compound Component on the
Function Diagram will be converted. The Compound Component will still exist in the Library and can still be
placed on Function Diagrams.
• The Compound Component in the Library can be converted. The Compound Component will no longer be
available to place on Function Diagrams.

Convert a Compound Component on a Function Diagram

To convert a Compound Component on a Function Diagram proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram containing a Compound Component is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the Compound Component on the Function Diagram.

2. Select the Edit menu then Macro/Compound Component, then Convert Compound Component to
Macro from the drop down menus.

Alternatively, select the function via the context menu (right mouse click > Macro/Compound
Component > Convert Compound Component to Macro )

3. A Macro will be created from the selected Compound Component.

The Macro can be modified without affecting other Macros.

Convert a Compound Component in the Library

It is not recommended to convert a Compound Component to a Macro if instances of the Compound

Component currently exist on Function Diagrams.

To create a Macro in the Library from a Compound Component proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Compound Component in the Library.

2. Select the Extras menu, then Convert Compound Component to Macro from the drop down menu.
3. A confirmation dialog will appear.
4. Click on Yes to create a Macro, otherwise click on No.

The Compound Component will be replaced by a Macro with the same name in the same Library Node. The macro is
represented by the macro symbol:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 236 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Any existing instances of the Compound Components on Function Diagrams remain as Compound Component
instances.

Creating the Macro in the Library has the following effects:

• The Port References remain unchanged when a Compound Component is converted to a Macro
• Any Prototype assignments made with the Compound Component are kept in the Macro.
• If the Compound Component logic contained component scheduling, the component scheduling settings will
not exist in the Macro.

When a Compound Component is converted to a Macro the GUID is removed from the Macro. If this Macro is
later converted to a Compound Component a new GUID will be created.

3.6.8.1.5 Macro Port References

Connections between Macros and the Function Diagrams where they have been placed, are made using Port
References. Port References are very similar to signal connectors, except they are used exclusively to make external
connections from Macros.

The description of Macro Port References is divided into:

• Making Port References: How to create Port References in Macro Diagrams.

• The Port Definition: The definition of the Port Reference and how it is edited.

An Example Using Port References

This example shows how Port References are implemented and represented.

The AF Blocks for a Macro have been implemented, but no external connections using Port References have been
made:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 237 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Port References are then connected to the AF Blocks in the Macro. Note that it is possible to use the same Port
Reference more than once for input signals. This is done by editing the Port Definition.

When a Macro has been placed in a diagram, it appears as a block with Port names the same as those of the Port
References.

The Macro is connected in the same way as an AF Block. In the Macro diagram the connection state of the Port
References is indicated by the Port Reference color.

3.6.8.1.5.1 Port Definition

The Port Definition allows definition of the Macro Blocks symbol, and contains the properties of the Macro Port
References. The Port Definition is created automatically when the Port Reference is made. However it may be
necessary to change the definition, for example to rename a Port, or make a signal available to a Pictogram in a Plant
Display.

To view or edit the Port Definitions for a Macro proceed as follows:

The Macro is open in the Diagram Editor.

• Open the mask for any Port Reference in the Macro.

The mask for the Port Definitions appears. All Port References for the Macro are included in the mask in a table (any
Port Reference mask in the Macro can be opened to access the same table).

The Port Definition mask has a different presentation and content depending on whether it was opened from:

• A Function Diagram where the Macro has been used.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 238 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• The Library Node where the Macro is stored.

•

Both variations are described:

Macro in a Function Diagram

The mask for the Port Definition has four sheets:

• Module Graphic
• Port Type
• Port Graphic
• IO Mapping

Changes can be made in the mask if required, click on Save to accept the changes, otherwise click on Close. Note
that only fields that are not grayed out may be changed by the user.

Macro in a Library Node

The mask for the Port Definition has five sheets:

• Macro Definition
• The Module Graphic, Port Type and Port Graphic sheets. These sheets are the same as for a Macro in a
Function Diagram as described above.

For a Macro in a Library Node, the Port Definition mask opens as a dockable window in the Diagram Editor. Changes
can be made in the mask if required and are accepted immediately. Note that only fields that are not grayed out may
be changed by the user. To close the mask click on the window close button.

Module Graphic

Module Graphic

Module Graphic is one of the sheets in the Port Definition mask. The Module Graphic sheet is used to set the
appearance of the property sheet names and the symbol styles of the Macro.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 239 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Parameter Sheet Names

The user can change the parameter sheet names in the parameter mask of the Macro. To change the parameter sheet
names proceed as follows:

1. Click on Add in the Register Page Names section.

2. A blank field will appear in the Register Page Names list.

3. Enter the following information:
o Value: This is the parameter sheet number. For example, enter a 1 for Parameter Sheet 1.
o Display: This is the new parameter sheet name.

The new parameter sheet name will appear in the parameter mask of the Macro the next time it is opened in a
Function Diagram.

Symbol Appearance

The graphic that appears in Macro symbols, when either the IEC with Icon or the SAMA symbol styles are in use, can
be set here. The following settings are required:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 240 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Select the Icon Type from the drop down list:

• No Icon: Text will appear, the same as with the IEC without Icon representation.
• Predefined Icon: An existing icon used for an AF supplied with the system.
• Image: Any image in the system.
• Text: Any text entered by the user in the Text field.
• Free Graphic Prototype : A free graphic Prototype.

Select the Alignment from the drop down list, this is the position that the graphic will occupy inside the Macro block:

• Centered
• Top

Select the Icon from the drop down list. This is the individual graphic that will be used. The contents of the drop down
list depend on the Icon Type that was chosen.

The Scale (%) (or size) of the graphic can be adjusted.

Port Type

Port Type

Port Type is one of the sheets in the Port Definition mask. The columns of the Port Type sheet are listed below:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 241 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Column Description
Name Name of the Port Reference, appears at the Macro Port when the Macro is placed
as a block in a diagram.
Description Freely assignable, becomes the Port description for the Macro.
Type Input or output signal.
Data Type Signal type e.g. boolean or floating point.
Connectable Is set if the Macro Port can be connected to.
Editable Is set if the default value for the Port can be edited.
Options Is set if the default value for the Port consists of options in a list.
Value The signal default value. Is set equal to the default value for the AF.
Minimum The smallest value Parameter can assume.
Maximum The largest value Parameter can assume.
Alarm Is set equal to the default value for the AF.
Alarm Type Is set equal to the default value for the AF.
Active Alarm Is set equal to the default value for the AF.
Deactive Alarm Is set equal to the default value for the AF.
Archive Is set equal to the default value for the AF.
Variation Min Is set equal to the default value for the AF.
Variation Max Is set equal to the default value for the AF.
EU Is set equal to the default value for the AF.
Id Automatically generated Port Id.

The contents of the Port Type sheet can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking on the
column title.

Port Graphic

Port Graphic is one of the sheets of the Port Definition mask. The user sets the appearance of the ports in the Port
Graphic parameter sheet. The columns of the Port Graphic sheet are listed here:

Column Description
Visible Name Name of the Port Reference, appears at the Macro Port when the Macro is placed
as a block in a diagram.
Visible Port To make the Port visible when the Macro is placed as a block in a diagram.
Name Visible To make the name of the Port visible when the Macro is placed as a block in a
diagram.
Alignment Which side of the block the Port appears when the Macro is placed as a block in a
Orientation diagram.
Alignment Order The vertical position of the Port in the block when the Macro is placed as a block in
a diagram.
Register Page Which sheet the Port will appear on in the mask for the Macro block when the
Macro is placed as a block in a diagram.
Register Order The vertical position of the Port in the sheet of the mask for the Macro block when
the Macro is placed as a block in a diagram.
Function Diagram To make the Port visible in the mask for the Macro block when the Macro is placed
View as a block in a diagram.
Plant Display View To make the Port available for Mapping to Faceplates.
Diagnostic View To make the Port available to the Diagnostic View.
Point View Editable To make the Port available for changes in the Point View.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 242 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The contents of the Port Graphic sheet can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking on the
column title.

Macro Definition

The Macro Definition is one of the sheets in the Port Definition mask. This sheet is used document general
information about the Macro.

Information entered in the following fields is for documentation purposes:

• Name - The Macro name cannot be changed in this field.

• Description - Enter a description of the Macro.
• Category - This number can be edited by the user. It may be useful to put similar types of Macros in the
same category.
• Author and Owner - These fields are useful for documenting the origin of the Macro.
• Serial Number - This number can be edited by the user. The serial number is used, with the revision number,
to identify the version of a Macro.
• Revision Number - This number can be edited by the user. The revision number is used, with the revision
number, to identify the version of a Macro.
Io Mapping

Io Mapping is one of the sheets in the Port Definition mask. These settings are used when generating Function
Diagrams with the IO-List View functions. Generated Function Diagrams can contain Macros.

The Io Mapping parameter mask is used to define the Macro:

• Category: The Category is used to filter data fields in the IO-List when editing profiles and exporting data.
• SubFunctions: The SubFunctions define how the IO-List data fields are mapped to the input and output
ports of the Macro.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 243 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The correspondence between the fields in the Mapping for IoList parameter mask and the IO-List fields are
explained in Macro and Compound Component IoMapping.

To create mappings between the IO List and a Macro proceed as follows:

The Io Mapping sheet in the Port Definition mask is open.

1. Select a category in the Category List that best fits the Macro.
2. Click on New to add a new subfunction.

To edit a subfunction select one of the existing Subfunctions in the list. Then click on Edit.

3. The New SubFunction dialog box will appear.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 244 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. The user has two options for creating a SubFunction:

o Option 1 - Enter a new SubFunction. Then select one of the Macro output ports in the OutPorts
drop down list. The signal subfunction will be mapped to this port.
or
o Option 2 - Click on Copy to open the Copy Subfunction.The user can copy the Subfunction of an
Automation Function .

5. Select one of the Macro output ports in the OutPorts drop down list. The signal subfunction will be mapped to
this port.
6. Click on Add in the Data Fields area. A dialog to select a data field from the IO-List will appear.

7. Select one of the Data Fields. The selected data field will appear in the Field list.
8. Click on the data field in the list. Then select the InPort of the Macro. This is the input port to which the data
field will be mapped.

9. Click on OK to save the changes, otherwise click on Cancel.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 245 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To delete a mapping select an item in the Data Fields list and click on Delete.

Publish the Library each time a change is made to the Io Mapping . The mapping changes will take effect in
the next synchronization.

3.6.8.1.6 Preparing Macros for Prototype Assignment

Operation interfaces to Macros are provided by Prototypes (i.e. Pictograms and Faceplates). In order for this to take
place, the Macro has to be assigned to a Prototype.

When a Macro has been assigned to a Prototype, the Prototype properties have to be mapped to the Ports of the
Macro. The Ports of the Macro first have to be prepared before this mapping can be made.

Macros also have to be prepared if the Ports are to be assigned individually to a Pictogram or Faceplate.

Why is this Preparation Necessary?

Macro Size

Users may place many AF Blocks and proxies in a Macro, all of these having their own input and output Ports. If all of
these Ports were to be made available for the property mapping it would be extremely confusing and difficult to find the
Ports when making the mapping.

For this reason the Ports to be used for property mapping have to be explicitly defined by the user.

Availability of HMI Ports

When AF Blocks are placed in Macros, they contain All HMI Ports. For some Automation Functions there are Ports
which are defined for HMI, but not I&C. These Ports would not normally be available in Function Diagrams, but in
Macros these Ports are also available.

These HMI Ports also have to be explicitly defined for use in Property Mapping.

How to Prepare a Macro

In order for a Macro Port to be made available for property mapping, it has to have a Port Reference connected to it.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 246 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Only Macros in Library Nodes can be prepared for property mapping. Macros already existing in Function
Diagrams cannot be prepared.

To prepare the Ports contained in a Macro for property mapping, proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Open the Macro in the Diagram Editor.

2. Establish which Ports are to be made available for mapping. In cases where these Ports are not visible on the
AF Block or proxy, proceed as follows:
1. Open the mask of the symbol.
2. For each Port that has to be made visible, tick the Visible Port check box.
3. Click on Save.
3. Connect a Port Reference to each Port that is to be mapped.

The prepared Ports will now become available for assignment in the property mapping of the Macro.

Port References made for Ports defined for HMI only, will not be visible in Macros when they are placed in
Function diagrams.

3.6.8.2 Placing Macros

Once a Macro has been created and stored in a Library Node in the Library, it can be placed as often as required in
any Function Diagram. Once a Macro has been placed in a diagram there is a special representation of it in the Project
View.

How to Select a Macro from the Library and Place it in a Function Diagram

The Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor, the Library is open .

1. Select the diagram window of the target diagram for the new Macro.
2. Find the required Macro in the Library. Select the Macro from the Library, with a single mouse click.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 247 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Move the cursor to the target Function Diagram. The Macro moves with the cursor over the Function
Diagram.
4. Move the cursor to the desired position in the Function Diagram, and click again.
5. A dialog box appears, the Macro may be placed either as an embedded Macro, or as a network in the
diagram.
o Click on Yes to place as an embedded Macro. The Macro will then be placed as a single block with
the Macro Name and Port References as defined when the Macro was created.

o Click on No to place as a network. The logic of the Macro will then be placed in the diagram, without
any Port References.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 248 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Macros can also be selected in permanent mode, a Macro will then be placed in the diagram with every
successive mouse click.

Representation in the Project View

When a Macro has been placed in a Function Diagram as an Embedded Macro, it has the following representation in
the Project View:

• In the Tree View : Function Diagrams which contain Macros are shown.
• In the List View : The Macros contained in a selected Function Diagram in the Tree View are shown.

3.6.8.3 Modifying Macros

Macros can be viewed or modified in a similar way to other diagrams. In Function Diagrams Macro blocks can be
copied, pasted or duplicated like any other symbol.

Opening Macros

To open a Macro either to view or modify it:

• Open the diagram in the Configuration Mode by selecting the Macro in the List View of the Project View. This
applies to both Macros stored in a Library Node , or Macros which have been placed in Function Diagrams.
• Navigate to the Macro from a Function Diagram where it has been placed.

A Macro can be viewed in the dynamic mode by selecting a Macro which has been placed in the List View of the
Project View and opening the Macro as a dynamic Function Diagram.

Changing Macros

The logic in a Macro can be changed in the same way as any Function Diagram. Logic can be changed or new Port
References may be added or deleted. The following points should be remembered:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 249 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

If a Macro stored in the library is changed, the Macros which are subsequently placed will not be the same as
those placed previously.

• If a placed Macro is changed it will differ from the others which have been placed.

Renaming Macros and Inheritance

Macros can be renamed in the Library, in the same way that diagrams are renamed.

Macros that are placed in diagrams cannot be renamed. Only the Tag Name and Tag Item can be modified. This is
handled in the same way as for renaming AF Blocks and Proxies.

The new name of the Macro will be inherited by the embedded diagram. If the values of blocks or signals within the
embedded diagram have been previously manually modified, the user can confirm whether or not the changes are
overwritten.

3.6.8.4 Deleting Macros

Macros can be deleted in Function Diagrams, in the same way as any selected symbol is deleted.

A Macro may not contain any active logic, if it is to be deleted.

3.6.9 Compound Components

A Compound Component is a user defined Automation Function. The user defines the logic for a Compound
Component using other Automation Functions. This logic is encapsulated and stored as a modular software
component in the Library. Like an Automation Function, a Compound Component is represented as a block symbol.

Handling of Compound Components is very similar to Automation Function handling for the following functions:

• Placing symbols on Function Diagrams

• assigning Prototypes
• importing from and exporting to other projects

A Compound Component that is placed on a Function Diagram is referred to as an instance. The internal logic of a
Compound Component instance cannot be modified. Only the Compound Component in the Library can be modified.
In this way newer versions of the same Compound Component are created. When a new version is created it is
possible to replace any instances of the Compound Component with the latest version.

Compound Components can be defined with varying levels of access protection. Access protection can be used to
limit the Compound Component use, viewing or editing rights.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 250 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Localization is also possible for Compound Component. Text in multiple languages can be included in the Compound
Component definition.

Compound Components are similar to Macros. But there are some fundamental differences in how the two
entities are handled in the system. The user should be aware of these differences to decide whether a Macro
or Compound Component should be used for a specific application.

3.6.9.1 Differences between Compound Components and Macros

Compound Components and Macros both contain user defined logic. They are both represented as blocks on Function
Diagrams with ports that connect to other Automation Functions. Despite the similarities, differences exist between
Compound Components and Macros that could make one more suitable than the other for different applications.
These differences are described here to help the user decide which should be used for a particular application.

Different Characteristic Macro Compound Component

Independent Instances When a Macro is placed on a When a Compound Component is
Function Diagram the logic is not placed on a Function Diagram the
linked to a source in the Library. Compound Component logic is linked
The Macro logic exists as an to the source in the Library through
independent instance. the GUID. Modifications to the
Modifications to the Macro logic Compound Component in the Library
on a Function Diagram or in the can be transmitted to other instances
Library do not effect other of the Compound Component in the
instances of the Macro in the project.
project.
Global Replacement Macro instances in a project can Global replacement of all instances of
only be replaced individually. a Compound Component in a project
is possible.
Internal Logic Other Macros and Hardware Compound Components cannot
Proxies can be used in internal contain Macros, Hardware Proxies or
logic. other Compound Components.
Component Scheduling Component Scheduling is not Component Scheduling is possible.
possible.
Relative Cycle Times Relative cycle times of AFs in the Relative cycle times of AFs in the
internal logic cannot be set. internal logic can be set.
Visibility Internal AF The internal AFs of a Macro are The internal AFs of a Compound
visible in tag search functions, the Component are not visible in tag
Alarm system or the Archive search functions, the Alarm system or
system. the Archive system. Port References
must be defined to make the AF Ports
visible.
Forcing Forcing is only possible from the Forcing is possible from the Point
Point View of the internal AFs. View of the Compound Component for
Ports with defined Port References.
Localized Text Localized text cannot be created Localized text can be created for a
for Macros. Compound Component Ports.
Access Protection All users can view and modify Access to viewing and modifying
Macros. Compound Component can be
restricted.
Automatic Versioning Documenting a version number of SPPA-T3000 automatically increments
a Macro is optional. the version of a Compound
Component after each modification.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 251 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.9.2 Creating Compound Components

Compound Component logic is configured on Function Diagrams that are stored in the Library. There are several ways
in which Compound Component Function Diagrams can be created:

• Create a New Compound Component in the Project View

• Create a Compound Component from an existing Macro
• Create a Compound Component from a Function Diagram

A new Compound Component that is based on the logic of an exsiting Compound Component can also be
created. The procedure involves first creating a new Compound Component in the Project View.

When a Compound Component is created it is assigned a Global Unique Identifier. This information stays with the
Compound Component when it is placed on a Function diagram, exported and imported.

Features

It is possible to include the following features in the logic of a Compound Component:

• Manual Component Scheduling is available for the AFs in a Compound Component.

• It is possible to set the relative cycle times of individual AFs in the Compound Component.

Restrictions

The following restrictions apply to Compound Component Function Diagrams:

• Global connectors and local connectors may not be used.

• Compound components cannot contain Macros, Hardware Proxies or other Compound Components.
• A single Port Reference is not permitted to be connected to multiple input ports.

3.6.9.2.1 Create a Compound Component From a Macro

Macros stored in the Library can be converted to Compound Components.

Preconditions

The following preconditions must be met before a Macro can be converted to a Compound Component:

• The Macro cannot contain other Macros, Compound Components or Hardware Proxies.
• All the users Macros and Compound Components must be committed.
• A single Port Reference cannot be connected to multiple input Ports in the Macro.

Create a Compound Component from a Macro

To create a Compound Component from a Macro proceed as follows:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 252 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Macro in the Library.

2. Select the Extras menu, then Convert Macro to Compound Component from the drop down menu.
3. A dialog box appears.

4. The Compound Component Name automatically takes the Macro name.

5. Select one of the following Protection options:

The Compound Component name cannot contain any spaces if license protection will be used.

o Unprotected - The Compound Component can be viewed or modified without entering a password.
o Password Protected - A password will be required to view or modify the Compound Component.
6. If Password Protected then the Define Password dialog box will appear.

Enter Password. Then Confirm Password and click on OK. The dialog will close.

Take care to remember the password. The password not retrievable if it is forgotten.

7. Click on OK, otherwise click on Cancel. The Create New Compound Component dialog box will close.

The Macro will be converted to a Compound Component in the same Library Node and is represented by the following
symbol:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 253 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Existing instances of the Macro on Function Diagrams remain as Macro instances.

Creating the Compound Component in this way has the following effects:

• The Port References remain unchanged when a Macro is converted to a Compound Component
• Any Prototype mappings made with the Macro are kept in the Compound Component.
• Any Alarm and Archive settings of internal AF output ports that did not have Port References will be
deselected.

3.6.9.2.2 Create a New Compound Component

The user can create a new Compound Component in the Project View. The logic can be added afterwards by editing
the Compound Component in the Diagram Editor.

Create a New Compound Component in the Project View

To create a new Compound Component proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Library Node where the Compound Component is to be stored.

All Macros and Compound Components of the user must be committed before a new Compound
Component can be created.

2. Select the Project menu, then New, then Compound Component from the drop down menus.

Alternatively, you can select the function via the context menu (Right Mouse Click > Create New
Compound Component ).

3. A dialog box appears.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 254 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. Enter a Compound Component Name.

Illegal characters are not permitted in the Compound Component name.

Do not uses spaces in the Compound Component name if license protection will be used.

5. Select one of the following Protection options:

o Unprotected - The Compound Component can be viewed or modified without entering a password.
o Password Protected - A password will be required to view or modify the Compound Component.
6. If Password Protected then the Define Password dialog box will appear.

Enter Password. Then Confirm Password and click on OK. The dialog will close.

Take care to remember the password. The password not retrievable if it is forgotten.

7. Click on OK, otherwise click on Cancel. The Create New Compound Component dialog box will close.

A Compound Component will be created in the selected Library Node and is represented with the following symbol:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 255 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Compound Component which has been created contains no logic. The Compound Component must be edited in
the Diagram Editor to create the logic.

3.6.9.2.3 Compound Component from Diagram

The function Compound Component from Diagram is intended to be used when a Function Diagram containing a
Compound Component has been imported into the project. The logic within the imported Compound Component will
be functional in the new project. The Compound Component itself and the Port References will not be visible in the
Tag Browser, or any search function. In order for the Compound Component to become visible the imported
Compound Component must be added to the Library. The Compound Component from Diagram function is used to
add the Compound Component to the Library.

Add a Compound Component Imported Through a Function Diagram to the Library

A Function Diagram containing a Compound Component has been imported into the Project. To add the Compound
Component to the Library proceed as follows:

All Macros and Compound Components of the user must be committed before a Compound Component can
be created.

The Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the Compound Component on the Function Diagram.

2. Click on the right mouse button to open the context menu. Select Navigate, then Embedded Diagram from
the context menu.

No forced Ports are permitted in the embedded diagram.

3. A Function Diagram containing the Compound Component will open in the Diagram Editor.
4. Select the Edit menu, then Macro/Compound Component, then Compound Component from diagram
from the drop down menus.
5. The Library browser appears.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 256 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Alternatively, select the function via the context menu (Right Mouse Click > Macro/Compound
Component, then Compound Component from diagram).

6. Select the Library Node in which the Compound Component is to be stored by clicking on it.
7. Click on Ok, otherwise click on Cancel.

A Compound Component will be added to the Library and is represented with the following symbol:

The imported Compound Component retains the same name and GUID when it is added to the Library.

3.6.9.2.4 Copying a Compound Component

New Compound Components can be created by copying existing Compound Components. The intended use of the
copied Compound Component will determine the method for creating the copy. The table below lists the two methods
and the effects.

Copying Method Effect on GUID Advantage

Method 1:Copying A new Compound The original and and the new CC are independent of one another.
CC logic in the Component with a new Making changes to the new CC does not effect instances of the
Diagram Editor. GUID is created. original CC and vice versa.
Method 2:Copying A new Compound Two CCs with identical GUIDs will exist in the project. It is possible
a CC diagram in the Component with the to make changes to either one of the CCs and replacing all
Project View. same GUID is created. instances of the new and original CCs in the project. This is useful
for keeping backups of Compound Components.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 257 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Method 1: Copying Compound Component Logic in the Diagram Editor

The user will copy a diagram in the Diagram Editor to create a new Compound Component that is based on the logic
of an existing Compound Component. To copy the logic of a Compound Component proceed as follows:

The Project View is open:

1. Create a new Compound Component in the Project View.

2. Open the Function Diagrams for the existing and the new Compound Component in the Diagram Editor.
3. Copy the logic of the existing Compound Component and Paste the logic on the new Compound Component
Function Diagram.
4. Modify the logic of the new Compound Component if desired.
5. Commit the Function Diagram of the new Compound Component.

A new Compound Component will be created with a new GUID.

Method 2: Copying a Compound Component Diagram in the Project View

To copy a Compound Component diagram in the Project View use the Copy and Modify function. A new Compound
Component will be created with the same GUID.

Example of Creating an Using a Backup Compound Component

The following example illustrates how a copy of Compound Component can be used as a backup.

1. A new Compound Component with the name CC_A_Rev0 was created and placed on several Function
Diagrams.
2. The user creates a new Compound Component CC_A_Rev1 by copying CC_A_Rev0 in the Project View.
CC_A_Rev0 and CC_A_Rev1 have the same GUID.
3. The user makes some changes to CC_A_Rev1 logic.
4. The user replaces all instances of CC_A_Rev0 with CC_A_Rev1 on all Function Diagrams by selecting to
change all instances of the GUID with CC_A_Rev1 in the Replace Compound Component dialog.

5. The user observes that CC_Rev_1 does not function correctly.

6. The user then reverts back to the functioning Compound Component by replacing all instances of CC_Rev_1
with CC_Rev0. The user does this by selecting to change all instances of the the GUID with CC_A_Rev0 in
the Replace Compound Component dialog.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 258 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.9.2.5 Compound Component Cycle Times

It is possible to assign relative cycle times to the Automation Functions in a Compound Component. Compound
Components are created with a base cycle time of 100 ms. Relative cycle time are calculated based on the base cycle
time.

The following example shows how cycle times are calculated when the Compound Component is placed on a Function
Diagram.

Example of Cycle Time in A Compound Component

The diagram below shows the cycle times settings for the individual AFs in a Compound Component.

In this example the NOT , RS and PULSE have the base cycle times of 100 ms. The ASMON has an cycle time setting
of 400 ms. Expressed in relative terms, the NOT , RS and PULSE AFs are executed every cycle. The ASMON is
executed every 4th cycle.

The diagram below shows the cycle times of the AFs in the same Compound Component when the CC is placed on a
Function Diagram in a Runtime Container with a base cycle time of 1000 ms.

The diagram shows that the relative cycle times of the AFs have been maintained.

3.6.9.2.6 Compound Component Port References

Port References in Compound Components are used for the following purposes:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 259 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• To create connections between Compound Components and other AFs on Function Diagrams where they
have been placed
• For assigning Compound Components to Prototypes
• To enable the setting of Alarm and Archive parameters in the Compound Component mask

Port References are very similar to signal connectors, except they are only used for Compound Components and
Macros.

Creating Port References for Compound Components involves the following tasks:

• Making Port References

• The Port Definition

An Example Using Port References

This example shows how Port References are implemented and represented.

The AF Blocks for a Compound Component have been implemented, but no external connections using Port
References have been made:

The Port References are then connected to the AF Blocks in the Compound Component.

When a Compound Component has been placed in a diagram, it appears as a block with the Port names the same as
those of the Port References.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 260 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Compound Component is connected in the same way as an AF Block. When viewing the contents of the
Compound Component in a Function Diagram, the connection state of the Port References is indicated by the Port
Reference color.

3.6.9.2.6.1 Port Definition

The Port Definition mask is used to define the following Compound Component properties:

• Properties for the Port References

• General Symbol Properties such as password, symbol appearance, language and version.

The Port Definition is created automatically when a Port Reference is made, however it may be necessary to change
the definition, for example to rename a Port, or assign password protection.

To edit the Port Definition mask for a Compound Component proceed as follows:

The Compound Component is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Open the mask for any Port Reference in the Compound Component.

Alternatively, right mouse click anywhere on the Function Diagram and select Edit.

2. The Port Definition mask will.

3. If the fields in the mask are not editable, click on Unlock on the Compound Component Definition sheet.
4. Edit the properties in the following sheets of the Port Definition dialog:
o Compound Component Definition - To edit the
o Module Graphic
o Port Type
o Port Graphic
o Io Mapping

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 261 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

5. Commit the Function Diagram to save the changes.

The Port Definition mask of a Compound Component on a Function Diagram can also be viewed. But none
of the fields will be editable and the Compound Component Definition sheet will not be available.

The mask can be opened in the embedded diagram of a Compound Component that has been placed on a
Function Diagram.

Compound Component Definition

The Compound Component Definition is one of the sheets in the Port Definition mask.

The Compound Component Definition sheet is used to:

• unlock the Compound Component for editing

• document information about the Compound Component.
• set the version number.
• set the access protection level.
• enter localized text.

Unlock for Modification

Clicking on the Unlock button will unlock the Compound Component for modification. The fields of the Port Definition
and the Function Diagram will be editable.

Documentation

Information entered in the following fields is for documentation purposes. :

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 262 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Name - The Compound Component name cannot be changed in this field.

• Description - Enter a description of the Compound Component.
• Category - The user can enter a category which will appear in the Library Node Documentation. It may be
useful to put similar types of Compound Components in the same category.
• Author and Owner - These fields are useful for documenting the origin of the Compound Component.

The documentation information appears in the Library Node Documentation.

Version

When a Compound Component is committed a new version will be created. The version number will have the following
structure:
Serial Number . Revision Number

• Serial Number - This number can be edited by the user, but only with values greater than the current value.
• The Revision Number is automatically incremented after a change in the Compound Component has been
committed. The user can overwrite the Revision Number with a number greater than the current Revision
Number. The system will continue incrementing the revision from the entered value on subsequent changes.
To enter a smaller revision number the user must increase the Serial Number.

The version number of a Compound Component in the Library appears in the Library Node Documentation.

The version number of an instance of a Compound Component on a Function Diagram can be viewed in the
Point View.

Protection

Protection - There are different access protection levels available for Compound Components.

To set the protection level select one of the following options:

• Unprotected - This selection allows the Compound Component to be opened in the Diagram Editor without a
password.
• Password - The selection only allows the Compound Component to be opened in the Diagram Editor after
the correct password has been entered. A password will also be required to view the Compound Component
logic in Dynamic Function Diagrams.
• To password protect the Compound Component proceed as follows:
1. Select Password.
2. Click on Edit. The Define Password dialog box will appear.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 263 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Enter a Password, and then enter the password again in the Confirm Password field.
• License - Access protection can be based on a specific license that must be installed to use, view or modify
the Compound Component. To select License protection the Compound Component license with write
access must be installed.

Localization

Localized Text is foreign language text for the name, port names, port descriptions and register page names of the
Compound Component.

The port names and port descriptions must first be entered in the Port Type parameter sheet before localized
text can be entered.

To create localized texts proceed as follows:

1. Click on Localized Text.

2. The Select Language dialog box will open.
3. Select a language from the drop down list for which localized text will be provided.
4. The Localize dialog box will open for the selected language.

5. The left column of the dialog box lists the text in the current Library Language setting. The right column is
language for which localized text will be provided.
6. The user can enter the localized text using the following options:
o Enter the localized text in the right column.
o Click on Copy All to simply copy all the text in the left column to the right column.
o Enter the localized text for some fields, and then click on Copy Missing. The empty fields will be
filled with the text from the left column.
7. Click on Save to save the changes or Cancel.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 264 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Port Reference names and descriptions will switch to the localized text when the Library Language is set to the
local language.

Module Graphic

Module Graphic is one of the sheets in the Port Definition mask. The Module Graphic sheet is used to set the
appearance of the property sheet names and the symbol styles of the Compound Component.

Register Page Names

The user can change the sheet names in the parameter mask of the Compound Component. To change the parameter
sheet names proceed as follows:

1. Click on Add in the Register Page Names section.

2. A blank field will appear in the Register Page Names list.

3. Enter the following information:
o Value: This is the parameter sheet number. For example, enter a 1 for Parameter Sheet 1.
o Display: This is the new parameter sheet name.

The new parameter sheet name will appear in the parameter mask of the Compound Component the next time it is
opened in a Function Diagram.

Symbol Appearance

The graphic that appears in Compound Component symbols, when either the IEC with Icon or the SAMA symbol styles
are in use, can be set here. The following settings are required:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 265 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Select the Icon Type from the drop down list:

• No Icon: A default Compound Component icon.

• Predefined Icon: An existing AF icon.
• Image: Any image in the system.
• Text: Any text entered by the user in the Text field.
• Free Graphic Prototype : A free graphic Prototype.

Select the Alignment from the drop down list, this is the position that the graphic will occupy inside the Compound
Component block:

• Centered
• Top

Select the Icon from the drop down list. This is the individual graphic that will be used to represent the Compound
Component. The contents of the drop down list depend on the Icon Type that was chosen.

The Scale (%) (or size) of the icon graphic can be adjusted.

Port Type

Port Type is one of the sheets in the Port Definition mask. The user can customize the Compound Component port
names and descriptions in the Port Type sheet. The other parameters are not editable. These settings are determined
by the parameter settings in the individual AFs in the Compound Component. The columns of the parameter sheet are
listed below:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 266 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Once a Port name is defined and committed it is not possible to edit the port name again. If a change is
required, then the port must be deleted and created again.

Column Description
Name Name of the Port Reference, appears at the Compound Component Port when the
Compound Component is placed as a block in a diagram.
Description Freely assignable, becomes the Port description for the Compound Component.
Type Input or output signal.
Data Type Signal type e.g. boolean or floating point.
Connectable Is set if the Compound Component Port can be connected to.
Editable Is set if the default value for the Port can be edited.
Options Is set if the default value for the Port consists of options in a list.
Value The signal default value. Is set equal to the set value for the AF.
Minimum The smallest value Parameter can assume.
Maximum The largest value Parameter can assume.
Alarm Is set equal to the set value for the AF.
Alarm Type Is set equal to the set value for the AF.
Active Alarm Is set equal to the set value for the AF.
Deactive Alarm Is set equal to the set value for the AF.
Archive Is set equal to the set value for the AF.
Variation Min Is set equal to the set value for the AF.
Variation Max Is set equal to the set value for the AF.
EU Is set equal to the default value for the AF.
Id Automatically generated Port Id.

Port Graphic

Port Graphic is one of the sheets of the port definition mask. The user sets the appearance of the ports in the Port
Graphic parameter sheet. The columns of the Port Graphic sheet are listed here:

Column Description
Name Name of the Port Reference, appears at the Compound Component Port when the
Compound Component is placed as a block in a diagram.
Visible Port To make the Port visible when the Compound Component is placed as a block in a
diagram.
Visible Name To make the name of the Port visible when the Compound Component is placed as
a block in a diagram.
Alignment The side of the block where the Port appears when the Compound Component is
Orientation placed as a block in a diagram.
Alignment Order The vertical position of the Port in the block when the Compound Component is
placed as a block in a diagram.
Register Page The sheet where the Port will appear on in the mask for the Compound Component
block when the Compound Component is placed as a block in a diagram.
Register Order The vertical position of the Port in the sheet of the mask for the Compound
Component block when the Compound Component is placed as a block in a
diagram.
Function Diagram To make the Port visible in the mask for the Compound Component block when the
View Compound Component is placed as a block in a diagram.
Plant Display View To make the Port available for Mapping to Faceplates.
Diagnostic View To make the Port available to the Diagnostic View

IO Mapping

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 267 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

IO Mapping is one of the sheets in the Port Definition mask. These settings are used when generating Function
Diagrams with the IO-List View functions. Generated Function Diagrams can contain Compound Components.

The IO Mapping parameter mask is used to define the Compound Component:

• Category: The Category is used to filter data fields in the IO-List when editing profiles and exporting data.
• SubFunctions : The SubFunctions define how the IO-List data fields are mapped to the input and output
ports of the Compound Component.

The correspondence between the fields in the Mapping for IoList parameter mask and the IO-List fields are
explained in Macro and Compound Component IoMapping.

To create mappings between the IO List and a Compound Component proceed as follows:

The IO Mapping sheet in the Port Definition mask is open.

1. Select a category in the Category List that best fits the Compound Component.
2. Click on New to add a new subfunction.

To edit a subfunction select one of the existing Subfunctions in the list. Then click on Edit.

3. The New SubFunction dialog box will appear.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 268 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. The user has two options for creating a SubFunction:

o Option 1 - Enter a new SubFunction. Then select one of the Compound Component output ports in
the OutPorts drop down list.
or
o Option 2 - Click on Copy to open the Copy Subfunction.The user can copy the Subfunction of an
Automation Function .

5. Select one of the Compound Component output ports in the OutPorts drop down list. The signal subfunction
will be mapped to this port.
6. Click on Add in the Data Fields area. A dialog to select a data field from the IO-List will appear.

7. Select one of the Data Fields. The selected data field will appear in the Field list.
8. Click on the data field in the list. Then select the InPort of the Compound Component. This is the input port to
which the data field will be mapped.

9. Click on OK to save the changes, otherwise click on Cancel.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 269 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To delete a mapping select an item in the Data Fields list and click on Delete.

Publish the Library each time a change is made to the Io Mapping . The mapping changes will take effect in
the next synchronization.

3.6.9.2.7 Preparing Compound Components for Prototype

Assignment
Operation interfaces to Compound Components are provided by Prototypes (i.e. Pictograms and Faceplates). In order
for this to take place, the Compound Component has to be assigned to a Prototype.

When a Compound Component has been assigned to a Prototype, the Prototype properties have to be mapped to the
Ports of the Compound Component. The Ports of the Compound Component first have to be prepared before this
mapping can be made.

Compound Components also have to be prepared if the Ports are to be assigned individually to a Pictogram or
Faceplate.

Why is this Preparation Necessary?

Encapsulated Automation Functions

Individual Automation Functions in a Compound Component are encapsulated. Hence the Ports of the individual
Automation Functions are not recognized as separate entities in any Tag Browser.

In order to make these ports visible the Ports References have to be explicitly defined by the user. The ports will then
be available for Property Mapping in pictograms.

Availability of HMI Ports

When AF Blocks are placed in Compound Components, they contain All HMI Ports. For some Automation Functions
there are Ports which are defined for HMI, but not I&C. These Ports would not normally be available in Function
Diagrams, but in Compound Components these Ports are also available. The M_SETP input port of a SPADJ
Automation Function is an example of this type of port.

In order to use these these HMI Ports for Property Mapping, they have to be explicitly defined by the user.

How to Prepare a Compound Component

To prepare the Ports contained in a Compound Component for property mapping, proceed as follows:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 270 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Project View is open.

1. Open the Compound Component in the Diagram Editor.

2. Establish which Ports are to be made available for mapping. In cases where these Ports are not visible on the
AF Block, proceed as follows:
1. Open the mask of the symbol.
2. For each Port that has to be made visible, tick the Visible Port check box.
3. Click on Save.
3. Connect a Port Reference to each Port that is to be mapped.

The prepared Ports will now become available for assignment in the property mapping of the Compound Component.

3.6.9.2.8 Preparing Compound Components Ports for Alarming and

Archiving
Output ports in a Compound Component must be prepared to allow the user to select Alarm and Archive in the symbol
mask when the Compound Component is placed on a Function Diagram.

Why is the Preparation Necessary?

Encapsulated Automation Functions

Individual Automation Functions in a Compound Component are encapsulated and are not recognized as separate
entities in the Alarm and Archive systems.

In order to make the ports of the encapsulated AFs visible the Ports References have to be created. The ports will then
be available for alarming and archiving.

How to Prepare a Compound Component

In order for a Compound Component Port to be made available for archiving and alarming proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Open the Compound Component in the Diagram Editor.

2. Establish which Ports are to be made available for archiving and alarming. In cases where these Ports are not
visible on the AF Block, proceed as follows:
1. Open the mask of the symbol.
2. For each Port that has to be made visible, tick the Visible Port check box.
3. Click on Save.
3. Connect a Port Reference to each Port that is to be mapped.
4. Open the mask of the symbol again.
5. Select Archive and Alarm in the symbol mask.
6. Click on Save.

Preparing the Ports will for archiving and alarming has the following effects:

• The Archive and Alarm columns for the prepared Ports will appear as selected in the Port Type sheet of the
Port Definition.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 271 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• When the Compound Component is placed on a Function Diagram the Archive and Alarm settings in the
symbol mask will be selected by default. The settings can be deselected. The archive and alarming
parameters will also be editable.
•

• A Port Reference that has been prepared for alarming or archiving cannot be deleted until Alarm and
Archive are deselected in the AF parameter mask.

3.6.9.3 Placing Compound Components

Once a Compound Component created and stored in a Library Node, it can be placed as often as required in any
Function Diagram.

The user places a Compound Component on a Function Diagrams in the same way as an Automation Function. The
Compound Component is represented as a single block on the Function Diagram as shown in the following example:

Once a Compound Component is placed on a Function Diagram the logic of the Compound Component can be viewed
by navigating to the Embedded Diagram.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 272 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Compound Component Availability

When a Compound Component is placed in a Function Diagram The Compound Component and it ports becomes
visible in the following Workbench functions:

• search functions:
o Find Tags
o Find Tag Usages
o Find Open Plant Display Mappings
o Documentation of Forced Ports
• Tag Browsers for configuration of:
o Reports
o Plant Displays
o Point Groups

3.6.9.4 Modifying a Compound Component

Only the Compound Component stored in the Library can be edited. Instances of Compound Components on Function
Diagrams cannot be individually modified.

To modify an existing Compound Component proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Compound Component to be modified from the Library Node where it resides.
2. Open the Compound Component in Configuration Mode.
3. If the Compound Component is password protected, the user will be prompted to enter the password.
4. The Compound Component will open in the Diagram Editor .
5. Edit the mask for any Port Reference in the Compound Component.
6. Click on Unlock on the Compound Component Definition sheet to allow the Compound Component to be
edited.
7. Make the changes to the Compound Component logic or Port Definition mask.
8. Commit the changes.

The latest version of the the Compound Component replaces the older version of the Compound Component in the
Library.

Compound Components which already exist on Function Diagrams are not affected. To update existing Compound
Components to the latest version, the Compound Component instances must be replaced by the user.

If Port References of a Compound Component are deleted then attention must be paid when replacing
Compound Component instances.

i.e. It is not possible to replace a Compound Component on a Function Diagram when there are connections
to external ports, which would not be available after the replacement.

Renaming Compound Components and Inheritance

To rename a Compound Component proceed as follows:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 273 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1. Open the Compound Component in the Diagram Editor.

2. Open the Port Definition mask and Unlock the CC from the Compound Component Definition sheet.
3. Rename the Compound Component in the Project view in the same way that diagrams are renamed.

The new name of the Compound Component will be inherited by the embedded diagram. If the values of blocks or
signals within the embedded diagram have been previously manually modified, the user can confirm whether or not the
changes are overwritten.

3.6.9.5 Deleting Compound Components

A Compound Component can be deleted in the same way as a Function Diagram is deleted. It is not recommended to
delete a Compound Component that is currently being used on a Function Diagram. Nevertheless, instances of the
deleted Compound Component on Function Diagrams will continue to be functional.

Deleting a Compound Component is irreversible. Rolling back is not possible.

3.6.9.6 Replacing Compound Components

Instances of Compound Components on Function Diagrams can be replaced with the current version of the Compound
Component in the Library.

The version of the Compound Component in the Library can differ from the Compound Component version on the
Function Diagrams when:

• Compound Components are imported into the Project or

• Compound Components that already exist in the system are modified.

In either case instances of the Compound Component, which already exist on Function Diagrams, are not
automatically updated. They must be replaced. The replacement function only effects those Compound Components
with matching GUIDs.

To replace older versions of Compound Components on Function Diagrams proceed as follows:

The Project View is open.

1. Select the Project Node or individual Function Diagram where the Compound Component will be replaced.
Alternatively, select a Compound Component in the Library which will replace the Compound Component
instances on the Function Diagrams.
2. Select Extras then Replace Compound Component from the drop down menus.
3. The Replace Compound Component dialog box will open.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 274 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. Select a Compound Component from the drop down list, if the desired Compound Component is not already
selected.
5. If more than one Compound Component is listed in the field Replace instances of, then other copies of the
Compound Component exist in the project with the same GUID. Select the Compound Components in the list
to be replaced.
If only one Compound Component is listed in the Replace instances of field then the user doesn't need to
select it. The listed Compound Component will be replaced.
6. The Compound Components will be replaced in the Function Diagrams of the Selected Node . To change
the Selected Node , click on the browse button. Then select the Project Node in the browser that appears.

All the users Function Diagrams must be committed before a Compound Component can be
replaced.

7. Click on Replace.
8. An Information dialog box appears with a list of tags of instances of the Compound Component.
9. Click on OK to replace the Compound Component instances, otherwise click on Cancel.
10. The Compound Component instances will be replaced by the version of the Compound Component in the
Library.
11. The effected Function Diagrams need to be committed to save the updated Compound Component in the
Project Container.
12. The Function Diagrams must then be activated for the changes to be executed in the Runtime Container.

The updated Compound Component will start executing immediately in the Runtime Container.

Compound Component replacement is not possible when the Compound Component on the Function Diagram
has connections to its external ports, which would not be available after the replacement.

The port parameter settings made in the new Compound Component will not overwrite the parameter settings
of the CC on a Function Diagram during a Replace.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 275 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.6.9.7 License Protection

License protection is one of the available access protection options for a Compound Component. When a Compound
Component is created its license can be acquired from Siemens. The installed license determines rights of users to
use, view or edit a Compound Component.

Acquiring a Compound Component License

To acquire a Compound Component license a license string must be provided to Siemens. The license string must
have the following format:
CC_ (Compound Component GUID) _ (Access Level Suffix)

• CC is the prefix used for Compound Component licenses.

• The Compound Component GUID is automatically generated when the Compound Component is created.

The prefix and GUID are displayed in the field beside the License option on the in the Compound Component
Definition mask as shown in the following example:

• Access Level Suffix determines what access rights users will have to the Compound Component.
• Use the suffix:
o _U to allow users to use the Compound Component in Function Diagrams.
o _R to allow users to read the logic of the Compound Component.
o _W to allow users to write changes to the Compound Component configuration.

A license string example: CC_Conve_CKe7RA_W

Siemens uses the Compound Component license string to generate either a new License File for the project or a
temporary license for the Compound Component.

License Types

There are two types of license types, permanent and temporary.

Permanent Compound Component License

A permanent Compound Component license is part of the License File that is installed on the Application Server. All
users on the system will have the access rights to the Compound Component as determined by the permanent
license.

Temporary Compound Component License

A temporary license is installed on a Thin Client. The access rights granted by a temporary license are only active on
the Workbench session on which the license was loaded. When the user closes the Workbench session the access
rights will be revoked. The temporary license can be installed as many times a desired until the expiry date of the
license.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 276 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Temporary Component Licenses are intended to be used only by Siemens service personnel.

3.6.10 Single Element Activation

For an introduction see Transaction Handling for Function Diagrams.

Activation and deactivation of complete Function Diagrams is carried out in the Project View . In the Diagram editor it is
possible to activate single elements and deactivate single elements in Function Diagrams (e.g. AF Blocks and Proxies)
as well as complete diagrams. The process for activating and deactivating single elements is the same as for complete
diagrams, except that single elements in diagrams are selected rather than the complete diagram.

The following transaction handling functions are available directly in the Diagram Editor:

Commit

Rollback

Activate AF

Deactivate AF

Commit or Rollback Last Activation/Deactivation

Preview Activation

3.6.10.1 Preview Activation

It is possible to preview a list of the AF Block updates made on a Function Diagram before the next activation.

To preview the AF Block updates on a Function Diagrams proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the Edit menu, then Preview Activation from the drop down menu.
2. A list will appear with all the AF Block updates made on the Function Diagram since the last activation.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 277 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Select a list item and right mouse click to access the context menu options.

4. Click on Ok to close the list.

The contents of the dialog can be exported or printed.

To preview the updates on an individual AF block, select the AF Block then click on the Preview Activation
icon. Only updates made to the selected AF Block will be displayed.

Alternatively, click on the Preview Activation icon on the standard toolbar.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 278 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Alternatively, the Preview Activation function can be accessed from other points in the Workbench:

If Automatic Activation Preview has been selected in Global Settings, then the Preview Activation dialog
will appear when a Function Diagram is activated from either the Diagram Editor or the Project View.

Preview Activation can be accessed from the Activation dialog in the Project View.

The Preview Activation icon is enabled in the Point View when viewing the Engineering Parameter sheet.

3.6.10.2 Activating AF Blocks

The AF Block will become active immediately, there is no waiting time for a transfer of code. Ensure that any
necessary precautions have been taken prior to activating e.g. informing operating staff of the change.

To activate elements in Function Diagrams proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

The diagram may not contain any uncommitted changes, and the user may not have any other uncommitted
changes in other Function Diagrams, prior to single elements being activated.

1. Carry out one of the following:

o Select an individual AF Block to be activated.
o Select multiple AFs to be activated simultaneously
o don't select any AFs (i.e. click on any empty space on the Function Diagram) to activate the whole
Function Diagram .
2. Select the Edit menu, then Activate AF from the drop down menu.

Alternatively, select the function by clicking on the Activate AF icon on the standard toolbar.

3. If Automatic Activation Preview was selected in the Global Settings then the Activation Preview dialog will
appear. The user then has the option to:
o click on Activate to activate the diagrams or

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 279 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

o click on Cancel

If Automatic Activation Preview was not selected in the Global Settings then the Preview
Activation dialog will be bypassed.

The selected AF Blocks will be activated.

When viewing the Function Diagrams in the Diagram Editor, activated AF Blocks are indicated with a blue
Frame, as per the Status Indication.

3.6.10.3 Deactivating AF Blocks

The AF Block will become deactive immediately, there is no waiting time for a transfer of code. Ensure that
any necessary precautions have been taken prior to deactivating e.g. informing operating staff of the change.

To deactivate elements in Function Diagrams proceed as follows:

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Carry out one of the following:

o Select an individual AF Block to be deactivated.
o Select multiple AFs to be deactivated simultaneously.
o Don't select any AF's (i.e. click on any empty space on the Function Diagram) to deactivate the
whole Function Diagram .
2. Select the Edit menu, then Deactivate AF from the drop down menu.
3. A dialog box confirms the selection to be deactivated.
4. To deactivate click on Deactivate, otherwise click on Cancel.

Alternatively, select the function by clicking on the Deactivate AF icon on the standard toolbar.

The selected AF Blocks will be deactivated.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 280 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

When viewing the Function Diagrams in the Diagram Editor, deactivated AF Blocks are indicated with a black
Frame, as per the Status Indication.

3.6.11 Quality Code for Feedback Loops

When logic which involves feedback loops is made, problems may result with the quality code of signals after the loop.
It is necessary to solve this problem as described below when designing logic with feedback loops.

A Description of the Problem

Each signal in the system has a quality code. The quality code of a signal leaving some logic should be dependant on
the quality code of the signals entering the logic. This concept is shown in the diagram below:

The quality of the output signal leaving the AND gate is BAD , since the worst quality state of the inputs is propagated
at the output.

When the logic contains a feedback loop the quality of the output is no longer dependant only on the input signals, but
also on the quality state of the feedback signals internal to the logic. This concept is shown in the diagram below:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 281 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

In the sequence 1..2..3, the quality of the input starts as GOD , changes to BAD , then back to GOD again. Note that
the output remains BAD , even after the input changes back to GOD . This is clearly unacceptable since the quality of
the output should depend on the quality of the input signal.

How to Solve the Problem

The problem is solved by ensuring that all feedback signals within logic always have a GOD quality state. In this way
the functioning of the logic will not be affected, but the computation of the quality code of the logic outputs will be
correct.

Two possible solutions are provided below.

Directly Setting the Quality State

Most Automation Functions have a QUALITY input Port that can be set to control the quality of signals appearing at
the output Ports of the Automation Function. When an AF Block has any input Port connected to a feedback loop, the
QUALITY Port for the AF Block can be set to FALSE. This ensures that the quality of signals from the output Ports of
the AF Block are always GOD .

Using a Quality Monitor AF Block

AF blocks are provided for quality monitoring of binary and analog signals. These AF Blocks can also be be used to
provide signals that always have a GOD quality state. Examples are given below for a solution for both binary and
analog logic.

• Binary Logic: Insert an BSQMON (Binary Signal Quality Monitor) AF Block before the feedback,
parameterized to ensure the quality is always GOD .

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 282 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Analog Logic: Insert an ASQMON (Analog Signal Quality Monitor) AF Block before the feedback,
parameterized to ensure the quality is always GOD .
•

3.7 Working with Plant Displays

Plant Displays contain static and dynamic elements, and are used for operation and monitoring. Dynamic elements are
created using Pictograms and Faceplates.

Creation of these dynamic elements in Plant Displays involves:

• Placing and Deleting Pictograms.

• Setting the Pictogram parameters.

3.7.1 Placing Pictograms

A Pictogram usually represents a device in the plant and is built-in in a Plant Display. The Pictogram displays the main
states of an Automation Function and allows the opening of the Faceplate for operation.
The Pictogram templates are collected in the Prototypes folder of the Library, and can be placed into Plant Displays
as described below:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 283 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Workbench needs to be opened and the Project View started.

After a Plant Display has been opened in the Diagram Editor it can be modified.

If the Library is not visible in the Diagram Editor it needs to be activated in the menu bar of the Diagram
Editor. File > Open Library

1. Find the required symbol in the Library.

2. Select the Pictogram in the Library, with a single mouse click.

3. Move the cursor to the Plant Display. The symbol moves with the cursor over the Plant Display.

4. Move the cursor to the desired position in the Plant Display, and click again.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 284 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Pictogram will be placed in the Plant Display.

The symbols can also be selected in permanent mode, a symbol will then be placed in the diagram with every
successive mouse click.

After these steps the Pictogram needs to be connected with the appropriate AF Block because the AF Block supplies
the Pictogram with the process information, needed for monitoring and operation.

How to assign these connections is described in the part Setting the Pictogram parameters.

3.7.2 Deleting Pictograms

Pictograms can be deleted in the same way as any other symbol in a diagram in the Diagram Editor.

Any changes have to be activated in the system to be available for the operator. The procedure for committing and
activation of changes is described in Transaction handling

3.7.3 Exchanging Prototypes

Pictograms and Faceplates can be exchanged in the Diagram Editor. The new Prototype inherits the properties and
mappings (including Special Mappings) of the old Prototype to the extent possible.

To exchange a Prototype in the Diagram Editor, proceed as follows:

A Plant Display is open in the Diagram Editor and a Prototype has been placed.

Typically when the Exchange Prototype function is used, the Prototype has also already been parameterized
including the process connection.
Otherwise it might make more sense just to delete the existing Pictogram and place the new Pictogram.

1. Select the Prototype (more than 1 may be selected simultaneously).

2. Select the Edit menu, then Pictogram , then Exchange Prototype... from the drop down menus.
3. The Message dialog box appears:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 285 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. The New Prototype list contains Prototypes which allow default mapping to the current Prototype. Select the
replacement Prototype from the drop down list.
5. Click OK to complete the exchange. Otherwise click Cancel to close the dialog box without exchange.

The new Prototype will be appear in the Plant Display with the same properties and mappings as the old Prototype.

Alternatively, select the function via the context menu (Right Mouse Click > Pictogram > Exchange
Prototype...).

3.7.4 Setting the Pictogram Parameters

This chapter describes how to assign a specific Pictogram or a Faceplate to the related AF Block. The AF Block
supplies both with the current process parameters.

3.7.4.1 Assigning the Process Connections

Appropriate connections have to be established between the AF Block and the related Pictogram or Faceplate.

• for status indication, or

• to make the Faceplates operable.

The following description is not for S7-CPU Faceplates. They only have to be assigned to the S7 Runtime
Container.

To define these connections proceed as follows:

1. Open the Plant Display in the Diagram Editor.

2. Double-click the Pictogram. A parameter window appears:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 286 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. After clicking in the edit field Tag-Name click the browse button which appears at the right side of the edit
field. This opens the Tag Browser window.
4. Select the desired Automation Function Block from the tag browser.
5. The edit fields Tag Name and Tag Item in the section Select Default Mapping will display the assigned
Automation Function Block.
6. Close the window with Save or abort with Cancel

Alternatively, the Tag Name and Tag Item can be manually entered.

If the default connections need to be individually modified, refer to

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 287 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Assign individual Ports to Pictograms or

• Assign individual Ports to Faceplates

Finally the changes above must be activated in the system in order to be available for the operator.

3.7.4.1.1 Manually Assigning the Process Connections

Appropriate connections have to be established between the AF Block and the related Pictogram or Faceplate. The
connection can be made using the tag browser or can be manually entered.

The following description is not for S7-CPU Faceplates. They only have to be assigned to the S7 Runtime
Container.

To manually enter these connections proceed as follows:

1. Open the Plant Display in the Diagram Editor.

2. Double-click the Pictogram. A parameter window appears:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 288 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. In the edit field Tag-Name enter the tag name.

4. In the edit field Tag-Item enter the tag item.
5. Close the window with Save or abort with Cancel

If the default connections need to be individually modified, refer to

• Assign individual Ports to Pictograms or

• Assign individual Ports to Faceplates

Automatic Checks

The system automatically attempts to make a process connection to an AF and checks the process connection after
the manual assignment. There are different possibilities:

• Tag-Name and Tag-Item match an existing AF:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 289 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

o If the Symbol-Type of the AF is permissible (i.e. occurs in the Symbol-Type drop down list): The
Symbol-Type will be adjusted automatically, and the process connection will be made.
o If the Symbol-Type of the AF is not permissible (i.e. does not occur in the Symbol-Type drop down
list): An error message will appear, and no process connection will be made.
• Tag-Name and Tag-Item do not match an existing AF: No process connection will be made. The Symbol-
Type setting has no relevance in this case and will be reset to the default setting.

3.7.4.2 Assigning the AF Type

In some cases Pictograms or Faceplates may have default process connections to more than one type of Automation
Function.

In cases where it is necessary to change the assigned AF, proceed as follows:

1. After the diagram is opened in the Diagram Editor double-click the Pictogram; the parameter window appears:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 290 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. If supported for the specific function, the user can select an alternative Automation Function:
o open the drop down list Symbol-Type to select an alternative AF type.
3. Confirm the selection by clicking Save or abort with Cancel.

3.7.4.3 Assigning the Faceplate Types

Automation functions to be included into the Plant Displays are equipped with a Faceplate for operation and
monitoring. There is a default assignment of such Faceplates to a certain function. In some cases an alternative
Faceplate is available.

In the case where it is necessary to use an interface other than the default Faceplate proceed as follows:

1. After the diagram is opened in the Diagram Editor double-click the Pictogram; the parameter window appears:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 291 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. If supported for the specific function, the user can select an alternative faceplate:
o open the drop down list Faceplate-Type to select an alternative symbol
3. Confirm the selection by clicking Save or abort with Cancel.

Finally, the changes made have to be activated in the system to be available for the operators.

3.7.4.4 Change default Device Symbols (For Symbol Faceplates)

By default one certain appearance of a technological device is used for the symbol in the plant display or faceplate,
e.g. a motor symbol. For some functions an alternative symbol is available, e.g. instead of a motor symbol, a fan or a
pump symbol is available. If an alternative symbol exists, it is described in the individual faceplate description.

To select an alternative symbol proceed as follows:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 292 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

1. The plant display, which contains the symbol to be changed, needs to be opened in the diagram editor.
2. Double-click the Pictogram. The dialog Parameterize Pictogram and Faceplate appears.

3. In the section Parametrize Pictogram / Faceplate click the button Pictogram Parameter

A Dialog may appear stating that the user must save the mapping before a special mapping can be
created. Click on Yes to save the current mapping and continue. Otherwise click on No to exit the
function.

4. In the section Other Properties scroll to the property name spec_Type.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 293 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

5. Enter the alternative symbol name, e.g. pump

6. To confirm the changes click the button Save in the dialog Parameterize Pictogram . Otherwise click the
button Cancel to abort the changes.
7. To select the symbol in the Faceplate, click the button Faceplate Parameter and repeat steps 4, 5, 6.
8. To confirm the changes click the button Save in the dialog Parametrize Pictogram and Faceplate .
Otherwise click the button Cancel to abort the changes.
9. The alternative symbol appears in the diagram,

and in the faceplate.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 294 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

10. Finally, the changes have to be committed and activated. For details refer to Transaction Handling for Plant
Displays.

3.7.4.5 Assigning individual ports to Pictograms and Faceplates

General Remarks

With individual assignment of ports to faceplates or pictograms, it is possible to ensure the same appearance and
operating behavior for each device, even when the interfaces differ from the default requirements of SPPA-T3000.

To perform these modifications successfully, some principles, which are explained below, have to be considered
carefully. The process of connecting ports to faceplates or pictograms is called mapping.

1. The individual mapping supports

o displaying of analog values
o displaying of binary status signals
o indication of buttons enabled or disabled for operation
o sending commands to Automation Functions
2. In any case pictograms and faceplates have to be connected to ports of Automation Functions which are
available for HMI.

To ensure that an individual port is enabled for HMI, refer to the detailed description of the
Automation Functions in the SPPA-T3000 library. Those ports are crossed in the column HMI

3. Elements in faceplates which send signals from the faceplates to an Automation Function have to be
connected to an input port. Usually such signals are operator commands. In the detailed mapping list of
faceplates these element names in the column Port start with M_***. Note that *** is the place holder for the
individual command. E.g. the element M_START conveys the manual start command from the faceplate to
the Automation Function.
4. Elements in faceplates which indicate an enabled or not enabled condition for operation, have to be
connected to an output port. Such signals change the appearance of command buttons. In the detailed
mapping list of faceplates these element names in the column Port end with ***_P. Note that *** is the place
holder for the individual command / permission. E.g. the element START_P conveys the permission to start a
device from the Automation Function to the faceplate.
5. Elements in faceplates or symbols which display a condition, can only be mapped to input or output ports of
Automation Functions. These element descriptions do not start with M_*** or end with ***_P, e.g. RUNNING
provides the visual indication of a running device via display of the color selected for this indication.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 295 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

For details on how to perform the individual mapping, refer to the following descriptions.

3.7.4.6 Assigning Ports individually to a Pictogram

Pictograms can only receive signals for displaying. Therefore only those ports shall be used for Pictograms which are
not classified as M_*** or ***_P (General Remarks).

The example below connects the TEST indication to an individual port.

To assign a port to Pictograms individually proceed as follows:

1. Open the Plant Display in the Diagram Editor.

2. After double-clicking of the Pictogram the parameter window appears.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 296 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The other tab of the Parameterize Pictogram and Faceplate dialog displays the AF Properties.

If the process connection has been established, then the tab mirrors the information of the Property
Sheet of the Automation Function.

3. Within the section Special Mapping click the button Map Pictogram . A table Mapping Details Pictogram is
opened:

The contents are assigned based on the default definitions:

o Property: The individual properties of the Pictogram.
o Symbol Type: displays the type of the Automation Function Block which is connected with the
property.
o Tag Name: displays the tag name which is assigned to the Automation Function Block.
o Port : displays the port of the Automation Function Block.
o Description: A description of the property, and where it is found in the Pictogram.
o Value: displays a constant value assigned to the Pictogram property if Symbol Type is (none).
4. To change the settings proceed as follows:
1. Select from the drop down list Symbol Type the type of the Automation Function Block which is to
be connected with the property.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 297 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

If Symbol Type (none) is selected, then the fields Tag Name and Port will be restricted.

2. Use the tag browser to search for the individual Automation Function Block in the project structure.

Select the applicable Automation Function Block from the search result.
3. Select the desired port of the alternative Automation Function Block.

4. If Symbol Type (none) was selected in Step 1, then the user has the option to enter a constant
Value or, when available, to map the property to the variation min, variation max or engineering unit
of another Pictogram property.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 298 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Copy, Paste and Reset Binding functions are accessible by clicking the right mouse button
to open the context menu.

Select Copy to copy the selected row into the paste buffer.

Select Paste to paste the previously copied row into the currently selected row.

Select Reset Binding to undo the changes to the selected row. i.e. the information will be
reset to state when the table was last opened.

5. Click Save to confirm the changes or Cancel to abort. The default mapping can be restored by
clicking on Reset.

The corresponding Faceplate inherits all Pictogram ports by default. Until inheritance in the Faceplate
is turned-off, the special mapping applies to both objects.

5. After the changes are confirmed, in the section Special Mapping the check box Select special tag becomes
selectable.

If special mapping has been made to an alternative AF Block, the user has the option of replacing the default
process connection, with this special mapping. In this case any reference to the process connection is
changed to the AF Block that has been specially mapped (e.g. in the Faceplate, or the tag name visible in the
Plant Display).
To select a special tag, select the Select special tag check box, then select the alternative AF Block from the
Special tag drop down list.

Finally the changes above have to be activated in the system to be available for the operator.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 299 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To adjust the appearance of the Pictogram refer to Parameterize the Pictogram Parameters

For detailed information concerning the interfaces refer to the description Automation Functions.

3.7.4.6.1 Inheritance Mapping of Individual Pictogram Properties

Pictogram properties can not only be mapped to ports, but in some cases also to the variation min, variation max, and
engineering unit of a Port already mapped to another property. In this way the value of a Pictogram property is
inherited from the settings of another Port.

The same steps apply to the inheritance mapping of individual Faceplate Properties.

To map a Pictogram property in this way, proceed as follows:

1. The Mapping Details Pictogram table is open.

2. Right mouse click in the Value field for the property to be edited:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 300 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To enable the context menu with the inheritance menu items visible, the Symbol Type must be set to
(none) for the given property. Otherwise the context menu will only have the standard Reset
Binding, Copy, and Paste options visible :

The context menu will have Use Variation Min..., Use Variation Max..., or Use EU... options
available as permitted by the type of Property. Otherwise they will be visible but unavailable.

3. Select the inheritance type (e.g. Use Variation Min...).

4. The Select Property dialog box opens:

5. Select the Prototype Property from the drop down list. The list contains all the prototype properties available
from the Mapping Details Pictogram table for mapping of the chosen inheritance type.
6. Click OK to confirm the mapping or Cancel to abort.
7. The mapping is displayed in the Value field.

3.7.4.7 Assigning Ports individually to a Faceplate

Faceplates can receive and display signals, and also send commands to Automation Functions. Additional tips for
mapping individual signals are provided in the General Remarks.

The example below connects the TEST indication to an individual port.

To assign a port to faceplates individually, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Plant Display in the Diagram Editor.

2. After double-clicking of the Pictogram the parameter window appears.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 301 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The other tab of the Parameterize Pictogram and Faceplate dialog displays the AF Properties.

If the process connection has been established, then the tab mirrors the information of the Property
Sheet of the Automation Function.

3. Within the section Special Mapping click the button Map Faceplate . A table Mapping Details Faceplate is
opened:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 302 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The contents are assigned based on the default definitions:

o Property: The individual properties of the Faceplate.
o Symbol Type: displays the type of the Automation Function Block which is connected with the
property.
o Tag Name: displays the tag name which is assigned to the Automation Function Block.
o Port : displays the port of the Automation Function Block.
o Description: A description of the property, and where it is found in the Faceplate.
4. To change the settings proceed as follows:
1. If active, first turn off the inheritance from the Pictogram.
2. Select from the drop down list Symbol Type the type of the Automation Function Block which is to
be connected with the property.

3. Use the tag browser to search for the individual Automation Function Block in the project structure.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 303 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Select the applicable Automation Function Block from the search results.
4. Select the desired Port of the alternative Automation Function Block.

Copy, Paste and Reset Binding functions are accessible by clicking the right mouse button
to open the context menu.

Select Copy to copy the selected row into the paste buffer.

Select Paste to paste the previously copied row into the currently selected row.

Select Reset Binding to undo the changes to the selected row. i.e. the information will be
reset to state when the table was last opened.

5. If Symbol Type (none) was selected in Step 1, then the user has the option to enter a constant
Value or, when available, to map the property to the variation min, variation max or engineering unit
of another Faceplate property.
6. Click Save to confirm the changes or Cancel to abort. The default mapping can be restored by
clicking on Reset.
5. After the changes are confirmed, in the section Special Mapping the check box Select special tag is
selectable.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 304 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

If special mapping has been made to an alternative AF Block, the user has the option of replacing the default
process connection, with this special mapping. In this case any reference to the process connection is
changed to the AF Block that has been specially mapped (e.g. in the Faceplate, or the tag name visible in the
Plant Display).
To select a special tag, select the Select special tag check box, then select the alternative AF Block from the
Special tag drop down list.

Finally the changes above have to be activated in the system in order to be available for the operator.

To adjust the appearance of the Pictogram refer to Parameterize the Faceplate Parameters

For more detailed information concerning the interfaces refer to the description Automation Functions.

3.7.4.7.1 Inheritance Mapping of Individual Pictogram Properties

The inheritance mapping of individual Faceplate properties is identical to that of Pictogram properties.

3.7.4.7.2 Property Inheritance from Pictogram

Inheritance of Faceplate properties from the Mapping Details Pictogram is indicated and modified by the check boxes:

1. If the check box is selected then...

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 305 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Inheritance active
2. If the user deselects the check box then...

Inheritance turned off

3. Modify the selection by clicking in the field and selecting from the drop down list...

Content modified
4. Select the check box again so that to restore the inheritance. The modified value is overwritten by the original
inherited value...

Inheritance restored

3.7.4.8 Parameterize Pictogram Parameters

The appearance of a Pictogram is determined by default.

To change the appearance of the Pictogram from the default, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Plant Display in the Diagram Editor.

2. After double-clicking of the Pictogram the parameter window appears.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 306 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Within the section Parameterize Pictogram / Faceplate click the button Pictogram Parameter. The table
Parameterize Pictogram is opened:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 307 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The contents in the column Value is assigned based on the default definitions.

Section Special Properties

• Property Name: displays the properties which are changeable
• Value: displays the current settings.
To change one of these settings click in the field and select an alternative setting from the drop-down list.
• After the changes have been applied, click the Save button to confirm the changes, or click Cancel to abort.
• The Reset button will reset all parameters to their initial default values.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 308 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Faceplate inherits the same properties as the Pictogram.

The details of inheritance are explained in Parameterizing Faceplate Parameters.

The values which are displayed here, have to be previously defined in the project settings.

Section Other Properties

For an explanation of these settings, refer to the corresponding descriptions for the Property sheet, and how the
number format is set.

Similar to the inheritance of the color and text properties (see Info-box above), the setting of the Other Properties can
also be carried through:

The setting for properties in the Pictogram, of which names begin with spec_, will be carried through to the
same property in the Faceplate.

Property names can be edited in the Prototype Editor. For more information, refer to The Property Table Page.

Finally the changes above have to be committed and activated in the system to be available for the operator.

Parameters can be reset to their initial default values.

Click on the parameter to select it, then reset the value using the context menu (right mouse click > Reset).

If it is necessary to define new colors refer to Customizing of the look-and-feel

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 309 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3.7.4.9 Parameterize Faceplate Parameters

The appearance of a Faceplate is determined by default settings.

How to change the default appearance is described below:

1. Open the Plant Display in the Diagram Editor.

2. After double-clicking of the Pictogram the parameter window appears.

3. Within the section Parameterize Pictogram / Faceplate click the button Faceplate Parameter. The table
Parameterize Faceplate is opened:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 310 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

4. When the user clicks in the field, a drop down menu appears providing alternative settings. Click one to
select.
5. Click Save to save the changes or Cancel to close without saving the changes.

The new setting is applied.

Inheritance

Inheritance of Faceplate parameters from the Pictogram is indicated and modified by the check boxes:

• The selected check box indicates that inheritance is active:

•

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 311 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

• Deselect the check box so that inheritance is inactive for that field:
•

• Enter a custom value. The selection is modified:

•

• Select the check box again so that inheritance is restored. The modified value is overwritten by the original
inherited value:
•

Section Special Properties

Property Name: displays the properties which are changeable

Value: displays the current settings.

To change one of these settings click in the field to open it, and select an alternative setting from the drop-down list.

After the changes have been applied, click the Save button to confirm the changes, or click Cancel to abort.

The values which are displayed here, have to be previously defined in the project settings.

Section Other Properties

For an explanation of these settings, refer to the corresponding descriptions for the Property sheet, or how the number
format is set.

Finally the changes above have to be committed and activated in the system to be available for the operator.

Parameters can be reset to their initial default values.

Click on the parameter to select it, then reset the value using the context menu (right mouse click > Reset).

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 312 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

If it is necessary to define new colors refer to Customizing of the look-and-feel

3.7.4.10 Faceplate Trends

From some Faceplates it is possible to directly open a trend display that shows important signals related to the
Faceplate. The configuration of these trend displays is carried out automatically by the system. It is however possible
to set parameters for them.

To view or change the parameters for a Faceplate trend proceed as follows:

The Parameterize Pictogram and Faceplate / Set Process Connection dialog box is open for the prototype.

1. Click on the Trend Parameter button.

2. The Parameterize Faceplate Trend dialog box will open.

o If a process connection has just been created and not yet saved, a dialog box will open to allow the
user to do this.
3. The signals which will appear in the trend display are shown in the dialog box.

The signals selected for a Faceplate trend may consist of archived and non-archived signals. When a
trend display that contains non-archived signals is opened, no historic data will be shown for any of
the curves in the trend display. The curves will be plotted only from the time of the opening the trend
display.

4. The following parameters can be set for each signal:

o Trend: To select if the signal should be assigned to the Faceplate trend.
o Color: To select the color of the signal in the Faceplate trend.
5. Click on Save to save any changes, otherwise click on Cancel.

3.7.4.11 Setting the Number Format

The format in which numeric values are presented in Pictograms and Faceplates can be set as part of the engineering
process. Typically the anticipated range of the signal that will be displayed is taken into account, and the most
meaningful number format is chosen.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 313 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The number format is set using two settings in the Pictogram or Faceplate parameters:

• numberOfDigits: The width of the display area available for the number.
• Format: A pattern that defines the exact way in which the value will appear. Format is described below in
more detail.

Format

The following characters are used to define the number format:

• 0: For any digit.

• #: For any digit, but will have no indication when it is not necessary.
• .: For a decimal separator.
• E: For scientific notation (e.g. 1.0 E03 = 1000).

These characters can be combined to achieve the desired result. Examples are provided below for both decimal and
scientific notation.

Decimal Notation
Value Format Displayed Value
123 0.0 123.0
123.4 0.0 123.4
0.05 0.0 0.1
123 00.# 123
123.4 00.# 123.4
0.05 00.# 00.1

Scientific Notation
Value Format Displayed Value
123 0.00E0 1.23E2
100 0.##E0 1E2
1000 00.##E0 10E2
0.000123 00.####E0 12.3E-5

3.7.5 Navigation Buttons

Navigation buttons enable:

• Navigation between Plant Displays in Operation Mode.

• Links to documents or the plant manual.

A navigation button can be configured to perform 1 of these tasks. Both options are described below.

Navigation to Plant Displays

To configure a navigation button for navigation to a Plant Display, proceed as follows:

A Plant display is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Place a navigation button in the Plant Display.

2. Double click on the navigation button, the Parameterize Navigation Button dialog box will open.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 314 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Select the Configure Diagram option.

4. In the Mapping section, select the destination diagram as follows:
1. Click on the browse button to the right hand side of the Path field to open a browser.
Select a destination diagram using the browser. This can be either another Plant Display, or a
Function Diagram.
The Diagram Name and Designation fields will be updated automatically.
2. Enter a Display Text. This is the text that will appear in the Plant display along with the button.
5. To set parameters, click on the Parameter button, and then set the parameters.
6. Click on Save to save the settings, otherwise click on Cancel.

The navigation button will now be implemented in the Plant Display.

The Plant Display containing the navigation button has to be committed and activated for the new button or changed
parameters to become effective.

Links to Documents

To configure a link to a document or the Plant Manual, proceed as follows:

A Plant display is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Place a navigation button in the Plant Display.

2. Double click on the navigation button, the Parameterize Navigation Button dialog box will open.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 315 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Select the Configure Plant Manual Link option.

4. In the Link section:
1. Click on the browse button (on the right hand side of the field) to find the document using a browser.
2. Enter a Display Text. This is the text that will appear in the Plant display along with the button.
5. To set parameters, click on the Parameter button, and then set the parameters.
6. Click on Save to save the settings, otherwise click on Cancel.

The navigation button will now be implemented in the Plant Display.

The Plant Display containing the navigation button has to be committed and activated for the new button or changed
parameters to become effective.

3.7.6 Working With Trend Displays

A Trend Display is an element of a Plant Display. Trend displays are used to display the chronological variation of
analog and binary values as curves. Trend Displays can be placed in a Plant Display with other pictograms, but are
commonly presented alone on a Plant Display.

Configuring Trend Displays in Configuration Mode

The initial configuration of the Trend Display is done in Configuration Mode. To configure a Trend Display in
Configuration Mode proceed as follows:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 316 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

A Plant Display is open in the Diagram Editor and the SPPA-T3000 Library is open.

1. Select the TrendDisplay prototype in the Trends Node of the Prototype Library.
2. Place the TrendDisplay prototype on the diagram.

3. Double click anywhere within the Prototype to open the configuration dialog.

4. Edit the settings in the General, Time, Tags, and Appearance tabs of the configuration dialog.
5. Click on Save to store the settings, otherwise click on Cancel.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 317 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Trend Display configuration dialog is described in detail in the Operation User Guide.

The Trend Display configuration settings made in Configuration Mode are the permanent configuration settings .
Configuration changes can be made to the Trend Display in Operation Mode. If the Trend Display is part of a Plant
Display, the changes will be lost when the display is closed. If the Trend Display is on a User Specific Plant Display,
the changes will be saved when the display is closed.

3.7.7 Working With XY Curve Displays

An XY Curve Display is an element of a Plant Display. An XY Curve Display plots pairs of process variables in an x,y
graph. XY Curve Displays can be placed in a Plant Display with other pictograms, but are commonly presented alone
on a Plant Display.

Configuring XY Curve Displays in Configuration Mode

The initial configuration of the XY Curve Display is done in Configuration Mode. To configure an XY Curve Display
proceed as follows:

A Plant Display is open in the Diagram Editor and the SPPA-T3000 Library is open.

1. Select the CurveDisplay prototype in the XY-Diagrams Node of the Prototype Library.
2. Place the CurveDisplay prototype on the diagram.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 318 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

3. Double click anywhere within the Prototype to open the configuration dialog.

4. Edit the settings in the General, Time, Op Points tabs of the configuration dialog.

The XY Curve Display configuration dialog is described in detail in the Operation User Guide.

The XY Curve Display configuration settings made in Configuration Mode are the permanent configuration settings .
Configuration changes can also be made to the XY Curve Display in Operation Mode. If the XY Curve Display is part
of a Plant Display, the changes will be lost when the display is closed. If the XY Curve Display is on a User Specific
Plant Display, the changes will be saved when the display is closed.

3.7.7.1 XY Curve Display Background Image

It is possible to import a background image into the drawing area of an XY Curve Display. A general procedure is
provided here:

1. Create an image file in JPEG, GIF, or PNG format in any application.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 319 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. Match the X and Y axes scaling of the background image to the XY Curve Display by:
o matching the x- and y-axes ranges set in the configuration dialog with the axes ranges on the
background image

and,
o cropping the image exactly along the x- and y-axes.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 320 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

Logarithmic scales cannot be used.

3. Import the image into the project using the Import utility in the Project View.

The image will now be selectable in the General tab of the XY Curve Display configuration dialog.

3.8 Integrated Engineering

In previous chapters, working with Function Diagrams and working with Plant Displays have been described
separately. There are however many dependencies between Function Diagrams and Plant Displays:

• For every dynamic element in a Plant Display there is a corresponding AF Block in a Function Diagram.
• A process connection must be made between every Pictogram and an AF Block.
• Function Diagrams and Plant Displays often correspond to each other e.g. The AF Blocks in a single Function
Diagram may all have process connections to Pictograms in a single Plant Display.

Integrated Engineering is an SPPA-T3000 feature that removes the separation between Plant Display and Function
Diagram Engineering. Integrated engineering makes the engineering process much more effective and efficient.

For example: When placing a new Pictogram into a Plant Display, the corresponding AF Block is made available
automatically in the Function Diagram, the process connection is made automatically.

How Integrated Engineering Works

Integrated engineering is explained as follows:

1. Corresponding Function Diagrams and Plant Displays are linked together with a diagram assignment.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 321 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. When objects are placed in a diagram, the matching symbols in the corresponding diagram automatically
appear in a reference list for that diagram.

3. The symbols can simply be dragged from the reference list into the diagram, the process connections are
made automatically.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 322 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

There are different options available for this process as described in Placing New AF Blocks and Placing New
Pictograms. There are also considerations when deleting AF Blocks or Pictograms.

3.8.1 Diagram Assignment

Many Automation Functions have operating and monitoring functionality in the Operating View (e.g. drives or
measurement indicators). For these functions a Function Diagram will have an AF block with a process connection to a
Pictogram in a Plant Display.

In many cases the majority of elements in a Plant Display have process connections to elements in the same Function
Diagram, or vice versa. In these cases a diagram assignment can be made between the two diagrams. This can be
represented graphically as:

Elements in a Plant Display often have process connections to elements in more than one Function Diagram. To allow
for this possibility, many Function Diagrams can be assigned to the same Plant Display. This is shown graphically as:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 323 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

A Function Diagram can only be assigned to one Plant Display.

Diagram assignments are created:

• Automatically, when creating a diagram: When a Function Diagram or Plant Display is created a
corresponding diagram can be created simultaneously. In this case the diagram assignment is made
automatically between the two diagrams.
• Manually, for existing diagrams: The diagram assignments of existing diagrams can be set manually.

Diagram assignments are always bidirectional i.e. when an assignment is made in one direction, then the
assignment in the reverse direction is made automatically.

How to View and Edit Diagram Assignments

The Project View is open.

1. Select the diagram (Function Diagram or Plant Display) for which the diagram assignments are to be made.
2. Select the Edit menu, then Diagram Assignment from the drop down menu.
3. A dialog box will appear containing the diagram assignments for that diagram. All other diagrams assigned to
this diagram are shown in the list in the dialog box.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 324 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The Default column is only available for the Plant Display assignment dialog box. The information is
used when placing new Pictograms in integrated engineering mode.

4. To make a new diagram assignment:

1. Select the diagram to be assigned.
2. Press and hold the left mouse button on the selected diagram and drag the diagram to the open line
in the dialog box (beneath the last entry in the list).
3. Release the left mouse button, the diagram will now appear in the list of assigned diagrams in the
dialog box.
5. To remove a diagram assignment:
1. Select the diagram assignment to be removed by clicking on it in the dialog box.
2. Click on Delete.
3. A dialog box will appear to confirm the deletion. To delete the diagram assignment click on Yes,
otherwise click on No.
6. To accept any changes made to the diagram assignment, click on Save, otherwise click on Cancel.

Alternatively select the function via the context menu (Right Mouse Click > Diagram Assignment).

3.8.2 Reference List

Every diagram (Function Diagram or Plant Display) has a reference list. When integrated engineering is being applied,
this list contains all the items which have to be placed in the diagram, in order to match those placed in the Function
Diagram or Plant Display that has been assigned.

How to Open the Reference List

A diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Select the File menu, then Open Reference List from the drop down menu.
2. The reference list will open, docked on the left hand side of the Diagram Editor.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 325 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

The reference list will stay open, it can be closed via the standard window close button.

The contents of the reference list can be sorted. Click on the column header cell of any column to sort the list
by that column.

Changing the Type

An Automation Function may have more than one Pictogram type available for it, that can be placed in a Plant Display.
The user may wish to change the type of an item in the reference list.

To change the type of an item in the reference list, proceed as follows:

1. Select the item by clicking on it.

2. With the cursor over the selected item click the right mouse button to open the context menu.
3. Click on Change Type in the context menu.
4. A dialog box will appear containing all the possible types that can be chosen for the Automation Function.

5. Select the new type from the drop down list.

6. Click on OK to change the type, otherwise click on Cancel.

Filtering the Plant Display Reference List

A filtering function is available in the Plant Display reference list to hide selected AF Blocks. This allows the user to
filter out AF Blocks that will not be represented on a Plant Display (for example, an AND block).

Filtering is not available on the Function Diagram reference list.

Showing All AF Blocks in Reference List with the Filtered Status

To show all AF Blocks in the Plant Display reference list as well as the Filtered check box column proceed as follows:

1. Click the right mouse button anywhere in the reference list to open the context menu.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 326 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

2. Click on Show All.

3. All AF Blocks in the reference list will be displayed in the list. The Filtered check box column is also
displayed, which indicates which AF Blocks have been selected to be hidden or shown.

Selecting AF Blocks to Hide or Show

To select AF Blocks to hide or show in the Plant Display reference list, proceed as follows:

1. Select the AF Block in the reference list to be hidden or shown by clicking on it.

Multiple AF Blocks can be selected by selecting a single item, then pressing the CTRL key and
selecting more items

or

selecting a single item, then pressing the SHIFT key then selecting another item. Both the items and
all the items in between them will be selected

2. Click the right mouse button to open the context menu.

3. Click on Set Filtered to be able to hide an AF Block or,
Click on Set Unfiltered to always show the AF Block.
4. A tick will appear in the Filtered check box if Set Filtered has been selected.

Any AF Blocks that were placed on the assigned Function Diagram while Integrated Engineering was
off, will automatically be set as Filtered in the reference list.

Hiding Selected AF Blocks

To hide the selected AF Blocks in a Plant Display reference list proceed as follows:

1. Select any AF Block in the reference list, and click the right mouse button to open the context menu.
2. Click on Show Only Unfiltered.
3. The AF Blocks with selected Filtered check boxes will disappear from the reference list. The Filtered check
box column will also disappear.

3.8.3 Placing New AF Blocks

When placing new AF Blocks with integrated engineering, the corresponding Pictogram will be made available in the
reference list for the Plant Display that has been assigned to it. The Pictogram can then be placed in the Plant Display,
the process connection will be made automatically.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 327 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

To place new AF Blocks using integrated engineering, proceed as follows:

A Function Diagram and a Plant display have been created, and the diagram assignment between them has been
made. The Function Diagram is open in the Diagram Editor.

1. Place the AF Block (which has operating and monitoring functionality) in the Function Diagram.
2. Open the assigned Plant Display.
3. The reference list for the Plant Display will contain an entry for the Pictogram corresponding to the AF Block
that was placed in the Function Diagram.
4. Select the Pictogram in the reference list be clicking on it.
5. The Pictogram can now be placed in the Plant Display, in the same way as placing a Pictogram from the
SPPA-T3000 Library.
6. The process connection to the AF Block is made automatically.

The reference list for the Plant Display will contain a list of all Pictograms that need to be placed in the
diagram, to match up with the AF Blocks placed in the Function Diagram.

3.8.4 Placing New Pictograms

There are two modes available for integrated engineering when placing new Pictograms:

• Integrated Engineering Off: There will be no integrated engineering functionality. Placing Pictograms on
Plant Displays and making process connections will not effect the reference lists of any Function Diagram.
• Integrated Engineering On:In this mode two options are available:
o Create new AF for Pictogram: An AF Block will appear in the reference list of assigned diagrams.
o Map new Pictogram to existing AF: A tag browser automatically opens to make a process
connection to an existing AF Block.

The procedure for setting the integrated engineering mode, and the two options available when integrated engineering
is on are explained below.

Setting the Integrated Engineering Mode

To set the integrated engineering mode for placing new Pictograms, proceed as follows:

The Diagram Editor is open.

• Select the Edit menu, then Integrated Engineering from the drop down menu.

The integrated engineering mode will now toggle to either on or off. The engineering mode can be changed at any
time.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 328 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

When integrated engineering is on the Integrated Engineering menu item is ticked.

Placing New Pictograms in Integrated Engineering Mode

A Function Diagram and a Plant display have been created, and the diagram assignment between them has been
made. The Plant Display is open in the Diagram Editor and Integrated Engineering has been toggled on.

1. Place the Pictogram in the Plant Display.

2. The Pictogram parameter window and the Tag Browser will both appear.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 329 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

When a Plant Display has multiple function Diagram assignments, the initial search node in the tag
browser is the diagram that was ticked as Default in the Diagram Assignment dialog.

3. Continue with either Option 1 or Option 2 below.

Option 1: Create a New AF for Pictogram

If the AF block for Pictogram does not already exist on a Function Diagram then proceed as follows:

1. In the Pictogram parameter window, enter the Tag Name and Tag Item for the AF Block that is to be created.

2. Click on Save. The Pictogram parameter window and the Tag Browser will close.
3. Open the assigned Function Diagram.
4. The reference list for the Function Diagram will contain an entry for the AF Block corresponding to the
Pictogram that was just placed in the Plant Display.

5. Select the AF Block in the reference list by clicking on it.

6. The AF Block can now be placed on the Function Diagram, in the same way as placing a AF Block from the
SPPA-T3000 Library.
7. The process connection to the AF Block is made automatically.

In cases of multiple diagram assignment, the AF Block will appear in the reference list of all assigned
Function Diagrams. When the AF Block is placed in one of the Function Diagrams, it will disappear
from all the reference lists.

Option 2: Mapping the new Pictogram to an existing AF

If the AF Block to which the process connection is to be made has already been placed in the Function Diagram then
make the process connection to the AF Block using the tag browser (as described in Assigning the Process
Connections).

3.8.5 Deleting AF Blocks and Pictograms

Deleting AF Blocks and Pictograms with integrated engineering is the opposite process of placing new AF Blocks and
Pictograms. If for example a Pictogram is deleted from a Plant Display (that had a process connection to an AF Block
in a Function Diagram), the Pictogram will reappear in the reference list for the Plant Display.

Before Pictogram deletion:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 330 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

After Pictogram deletion:

If the Plant Display had been committed before the deletion, then the Pictogram is set as Filtered in the
reference list.

Similarly, if a AF Block is deleted from a Function Diagram (that had a process connection to an Pictogram in a Plant
Display), the AF Block will reappear in the reference list for the Function Diagram.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45
 Engineering User Guide (2/3) Page: 331 of 331
LKZ:DE AL:N ECCN:4E992

If the Plant Display had been committed before the deletion, then the AF Block will disappear from the
Function Diagram reference list.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 Version:

All Rights Reserved Date: 2008_01_29 rel_4.40_en_2008_01_28_17_45